JP2011147761A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably coping with hall conditions. <P>SOLUTION: By the game machine, while one display performance mode is set to a mode setting means, a period of satisfying a predetermined condition is measured by a mode setting period measuring means, and the measured period is stored corresponding to each of a plurality of display performance modes in a mode setting storage means. Thus, since the period of satisfying the predetermined condition can be compared among the respective display performance modes, the respective display performance modes are evaluated and thus the game machine capable of suitably coping with the hall conditions is provided. In this case, when the predetermined condition has a condition representing that a player has actually played in the display performance mode, since contents stored in the mode setting period storage means reflect the support degree of the player for the respective display performance modes, the initial display performance mode after power supply is appropriately set and they are utilized as information useful for future game machine development. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine or a slot machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines are provided with a liquid crystal display screen, for example. In a gaming machine equipped with a liquid crystal display screen, for example, when the start condition is satisfied (for example, winning a ball at the start opening), the pattern is displayed in a variable manner on the liquid crystal display screen, and the change display stops. If the stop symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display screen is a combination of symbols determined in advance, a special game state advantageous to the player is generated, and a large amount of prize balls can be paid out. Further, in a gaming machine having a liquid crystal display screen, for example, various notices, reach effects, etc. are displayed on the liquid crystal display screen, and the device is devised to enhance the interest of the game. Some of these gaming machines are provided with an effect mode change button capable of changing the effect mode by a player's operation.

JP 2006-174955 A

  However, although the display effect can be diversified by providing the effect mode change button on the gaming machine, since the change of the current effect mode is due to the player's operation, there is a possibility that it does not necessarily correspond to the hall circumstances. It was.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably cope with a hall situation.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes display means capable of executing a display effect, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, A mode setting means for setting one display effect mode from among a plurality of display effect modes, and a display effect mode set in the mode setting means from effect data stored in the effect data storage means. The mode setting when the display control means for displaying the display effect on the display means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time. And a mode switching means for switching the display effect mode set in the means to another display effect mode and setting the display effect mode. A mode setting period measuring unit that measures a period satisfying a predetermined condition while being set in the unit, and each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period measured by the mode setting period measuring unit are associated with the measurement. Mode setting period storage means capable of storing and storing the determined periods.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a main power supply, wherein the mode setting period storage means stores the contents even when power supply from the main power supply is disabled. Is configured to be able to hold.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is a display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing a display effect in a plurality of display effect modes, and the plurality of display effect modes. The mode setting means for setting one display effect mode and the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect data stored in the effect data storage means, A display control means for displaying a display effect on the display means, and a mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. And a period measured by the mode setting period measuring means and a display effect mode as a measurement target are associated with each other so that predetermined information can be stored outside the gaming machine. And a data output means for outputting so as to be stored in the unit.

  The gaming machine according to claim 4 includes: a display unit capable of executing a display effect; an effect data storage unit storing effect data capable of executing a display effect in a plurality of display effect modes; and the plurality of display effect modes. The mode setting means for setting one display effect mode and the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect data stored in the effect data storage means, A display control means for displaying a display effect on the display means, and a storage means for storing information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means outside the gaming machine Mode information output means for outputting the information so that it can be stored in the memory, and storage means for storing the information indicating that the player is playing a game, with predetermined information outside the gaming machine And a game in the information output means for outputting so as to be stored.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, display means capable of executing a display effect, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and a plurality of display effect modes. From among the mode setting means for setting one display effect mode and effect data stored in the effect data storage means, the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is used. The display control means for displaying the display effect on the display means, the operation means operable by the player, and the mode setting means when the operation means is operated at a predetermined time. Mode switching means for switching and setting the display effect mode to another display effect mode, wherein one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition, and storing the measured period in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period measured by the mode setting period measuring means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the following effect is obtained. The mode setting period storage means includes a main power supply, and is configured to be able to hold the stored contents even when power supply from the main power supply is disabled. Is useful, and the accuracy of evaluation for each display effect mode can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, display means capable of executing a display effect, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and the plurality of display effect modes. From among the mode setting means for setting one display effect mode and effect data stored in the effect data storage means, the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is used. And a display control means for displaying a display effect on the display means, and a mode setting period for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Predetermined information can be stored outside the gaming machine by associating the measurement means with the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means and the display effect mode as the measurement target Is provided with the output information output means so as to be stored in Do storage means, has the effect of enabling provision of a suitably compatible gaming machine hall circumstances.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 4, display means capable of executing a display effect, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and a plurality of display effect modes. From among the mode setting means for setting one display effect mode and effect data stored in the effect data storage means, the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is used. A display control means for displaying a display effect on the display means, and information indicating a display effect mode set in the mode setting means can be stored outside the gaming machine as predetermined information. Mode information output means for outputting so that it can be stored in the storage means, information indicating that the player is playing, and information that can store predetermined information outside the gaming machine Since a game in information output means for outputting so as to be stored in the unit, it has the effect of enabling provision of a suitably compatible gaming machine hall circumstances.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of a back surface mode switch. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display screen of a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation ball | bowl storage area forward transfer process performed in the fluctuation | variation process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in the change process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows a NMI interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode change confirmation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the audio | voice lamp effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the display effect process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display process performed in the display effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows each display process performed in the display effect process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption process performed by the production | presentation control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game system of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game system of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main controller of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hall computer output information setting process performed in the timer interruption process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a mode selection counter setting process executed in the start-up process of FIG. 29. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode change confirmation process performed in the main process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the data reception process performed by the hall computer of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the changing signal confirmation process performed in the data reception process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by the presentation control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 6) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16. On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is a button operated by the player and functions as a button for changing the effect mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with three types from the first effect mode to the third effect mode as effect modes (display effect modes). These three types of effect modes can be switched by operating the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect). That is, the player can switch to the effect mode according to his / her preference by appropriately operating the frame button 22 at an appropriate timing.

  It should be noted that the three types of effect modes provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, that is, the first to third effect modes, are the background image, the contents of the notice effect, the notice character appearing, and the reach, respectively. It differs in the point of the contents of the production of time. For example, the first effect mode is configured as a mode for performing the simplest effect with the underwater background, and the second effect mode is configured as a mode for performing an effect in which the girl of the main character searches for the underwater. The mode is configured as a mode for performing an effect that characterizes the model of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, an effect with the beach in the resort as a background).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j (see FIG. 6) of the effect control device 117 when the frame button 22 is operated when the power is turned on. Based on the value, the mode total stay time of the three types of effect modes (first to third effect modes) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Although details will be described later, the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are memories for accumulating and storing the variation time each time the variation display is executed in the set effect mode. These total residence time memories 273h to 273j can retain the stored contents even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 (power from the power supply device 115) is cut off by the power supplied from the backup capacitor 281 (see FIG. 6). It is configured. Therefore, the values stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are values that reflect the length of time that the player actually played in the set effect mode, in other words, This value reflects the player's support level for the effect mode. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment operates the frame button 22 when the power is turned on to calculate the mode total stay time of each effect mode, which is a value indicating the player's support level for each effect mode, as shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81.

  Further, the frame button 22 can cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a different display according to the operation timing. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It can be changed to a presentation that you can have.

  In addition, the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs. In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor (not shown) for pressing, a push button type stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 by electric resistance. And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the change of the signal. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor (not shown) changes corresponding to the operation amount. A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. It is. Note that when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor (not shown) and the stop switch (not shown) are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the second ball entrance 67 (through gate), the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. In FIG. 2, a part of a nail, a metal fitting, or the like is deleted and illustrated for easy understanding of the reference numerals. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Below, the structure of the game board 13 is demonstrated.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Falling area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first symbol display device 37 for mainly displaying the first symbol is disposed in the upper right portion of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right portion of FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37 is provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b which are light emitting means.

  Several LED37a in the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 alert | reports various information by a lighting state. Specifically, the LED 37a indicates a first symbol corresponding to a lottery lottery result made by the main controller 110 (see FIGS. 3 and 6) by a lighting state. As a jackpot lottery result, for example, when there are three types of lottery results of probability variation jackpot, normal jackpot, and out, if the lottery result is “probable variation jackpot”, the LED 37a is “ The 1st symbol corresponding to "probability big hit" is shown. Similarly, the LED 37a indicates the first symbol corresponding to “normal jackpot” and “off” according to the lottery result by the lighting state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, three lottery results of “probable big hit”, “normal jackpot”, and “out” are provided as the jackpot lottery results. Based on the prize winning, whether “probable jackpot”, “ordinary jackpot”, or “out” is drawn.

  If the result of the lottery is “probable big win”, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol corresponding to “probable big jackpot” as a stop symbol, and then the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery Will become a game state that is likely to be shifted to the special game state by increasing from the normal probability, and the hit probability of the second symbol to be described later will be higher than the normal probability, and will be attached to the first entrance 64 (see FIG. 2). The electric accessory to be released is released for a predetermined time, and the ball is easy to enter the first entrance 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as “probability changing” (probability changing state).

  On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “ordinary jackpot”, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol corresponding to “ordinary jackpot” as the stop symbol, and then the jackpot of the jackpot lottery The probability remains the normal probability, but the hit probability of the second symbol is higher than the normal probability, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time, and the ball enters the first entrance It becomes easy to enter the mouth 64. Hereinafter, this state is referred to as a time-shortage (time-short state).

  It should be noted that during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory opens | releases around the time.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery is “out”, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol corresponding to “out” as a stop symbol, and the game is neither probable nor short in time. The state, that is, the jackpot probability of the jackpot lottery and the hit probability of the second symbol are the normal probability. Hereinafter, such a state that is neither in the probability change (probability change state) nor in the time reduction (time reduction state) is referred to as a normal state (normal state).

  Further, the LED 37a indicates whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, whether it is probable, short, normal, or the like) is variably displayed (changed) depending on the lighting state. Is indicated by the lighting state, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state.

  These LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by the combination of the emission colors. . The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 includes a third liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “LCD”) that displays the third symbol in a variable manner with a winning (winning) to the first entrance 64 as a trigger. A symbol display device 81, a second symbol display portion 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere at the second entrance 67 (through gate), and a second entrance 67 ( There is provided a second symbol holding lamp 84 indicating the number of balls held through the through gate).

  The display content of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by an effect control device 117, which will be described later. For example, three symbol strings of left, middle, and right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 ( (See FIG. 5). In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the variable display device unit 80 surrounds the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 so as to surround the center frame. 86 is arranged. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the first symbol indicating the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 and the jackpot lottery result, while the first symbol is displayed. A decorative display (variation effect) corresponding to the display on the display device 37 is performed on the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the LCD, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In addition, after the jackpot lottery is started, in the first symbol display device 37, any one of various stop symbols (for example, the first symbol indicating a probable jackpot, the first symbol indicating a normal jackpot, or the first symbol indicating a loss) If the ball wins (enters) the first entrance 64 before the one is displayed, the number of winning (entering) is retained up to 4 times, In addition to being shown by the first symbol display device 37, it is also shown in the number of lights of the special figure holding lamp 85. Hereinafter, the number of suspensions for the first entrance 64 is referred to as a special figure reservation ball number N. Four special figure holding lamps 85 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holding times, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although it is comprised so that the prize-winning to the 1st entrance 64 may be suspended up to a maximum of 4 times, the maximum number of suspension is not limited to 4 times, or 3 times or less, or You may set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Also, the special figure holding lamp 85 is deleted, and the variable display holding number based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically displayed on a part of the third symbol display device 81 or divided into four areas. May be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of times of holding. Further, the number of suspensions may be displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this case, the special figure hold lamp 85 may not perform the lighting display.

  Each time the sphere passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate), the second symbol display unit 83 alternates between the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as the display symbol (second symbol). The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display on the second symbol display unit 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“◯” symbol), the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is only for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an open state so that the ball can easily enter the first entrance 64.

  The number of passes through the second entrance 67 (through gate) of the ball is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of hold times is lit and displayed on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display unit 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the number of times the ball is held at the second entrance 67 (through gate) is not limited to the maximum number of 4 as in the case of the first entrance 64, but 3 times or less, or 5 You may set to the frequency | count (for example, 8 times) more than times. Moreover, since the number of times of holding is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch 208a is turned on. Then, the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery, the first symbol display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the decoration according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 A typical display is shown by the third symbol display device 81.

  The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the general prize opening 63 are the same. Although configured, a different number may be used. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first entrance 64 may be 20.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. At the same time, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 16 times (16 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid that opens and closes forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis (shown in FIG. 6). Part of the solenoid 209). The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is easy to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is lit in a manner corresponding to the jackpot, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110) and an effect control board (effect control device 117). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116. Yes.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the effect control device 117, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 6). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  In addition, the effect control device 117 is provided with a back mode switch 75. The back mode switch 75 is a switch for instructing an effect mode that is initially set after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In other words, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the effect mode instructed by the back mode switch 75 is automatically set. The effect mode that can be instructed (that is, settable) by the back mode switch 75 is the effect mode that can be set by the above-described frame button 22 (that is, the first to third effect modes).

  The frame button 22 described above is provided on the front side (front side) of the pachinko machine 10 and is a button for the player to operate, whereas the back mode switch 75 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Is a dedicated switch for operating not the player but the hall employee. Although details will be described later, the setting state of the back mode switch 75 is read only when the power is turned on, and an effect mode corresponding to the setting state is set. Therefore, a hall employee or the like operates the back mode switch 75 before turning on the power, and among the first to third production modes, the production mode that is convenient for the hall (for example, the most popular production mode, likes and dislikes) Can be set as the first production mode at the start of the hall operation, that is, in the morning.

  Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot provided with a plurality of performance modes that can be selected by a player, the first performance mode after power-on is fixedly determined as one of the performance modes. It is common to be. However, there may be a case where the first performance mode after the power-on determined in such a fixed manner is not very preferable for the player. The player can switch to the desired presentation mode by operating the frame button 22, but switching the presentation mode based on the operation of the frame button 22 is not always easy. May cause problems because it depends only on the player's operation.

  For example, since the operation time of the frame button 22 that can switch the effect mode is limited (in this embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during the customer waiting effect), even if the frame button 22 is operated, the operation time is incorrect. If there is no change in the effect mode, the frame button 22 is recognized as another function button and an unintended display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If this happens, the player may feel frustrated or bothered about changing the production mode, and the interest of the game may be reduced. In addition, when the player does not understand the operation of the production mode or is unfamiliar with the operation, the production mode cannot be switched well, and the player is forced to play in the production mode he does not like. As a result, the interest of the game may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, apart from the frame button 22 operated by the player, the back mode switch 75 for reading the setting state only when the power is turned on is provided. A production mode that is convenient for the hall can be set as the production mode when the hall starts business. Therefore, by setting the production mode at the start of the hall to an appropriate production mode (display production mode) according to the customer base of the hall, the player who plays the game in the hall plays in the production mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of a situation that must be reduced can be reduced. That is, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game with low interest. In addition, if a highly entertaining game can be provided to the player, as a result, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 is increased, which is also suitable for the hall.

  Here, the configuration of the back mode switch 75 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the back mode switch 75. As shown in FIG. 4, the back mode switch 75 has a knob 75a, and is configured as a mechanical slide switch that switches inputs by sliding the knob 75a. The numbers “1”, “2”, and “3” written below the back mode switch 75 correspond to the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode, respectively. By positioning the knob 75a at any position, it is possible to designate (switch designation) an effect mode corresponding to the position of the knob 75a.

  More specifically, when the knob 75a is set to the position “1”, the contact 77a of the circuit 77 is connected to the contact 76a, and as a result, the MPU 271 (see FIG. 6) of the effect control device 117 stands. In the raising process (see FIG. 17), it is detected that the first effect mode is designated. Further, when the knob 75a is set at the position “2”, the contact point 77a of the circuit 77 is connected to the contact point 76b. As a result, the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 has the second effect mode in the start-up process. Detect specified. Further, when the knob 75a is set at the position “3”, the contact point 77a of the circuit 77 is connected to the contact point 76c. As a result, the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 has the third effect mode in the start-up process. Detect specified.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the display content displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols consisting of 10 types of character symbols corresponding to the numbers from “0” to “9”, and one type of sub symbol formed smaller than this main symbol (in this embodiment). , Shell picture). These main symbols and sub symbols constitute a symbol row (virtual symbol reel) by arranging the main symbols in ascending or descending order of numbers and arranging the sub symbols between the main symbols.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 is a big hit, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are aligned and stopped, and after the variable display (that is, the same After the main symbols are aligned and stopped, the jackpot is configured to occur. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added are stopped. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the jackpot is over, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are stopped together.

  In this embodiment, the variation direction of the symbol is the horizontal direction X, and in the variation in the horizontal direction (horizontal scrolling), each symbol row includes three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of upper, middle, and lower. The third symbol is displayed in three stages of left, middle and right for each symbol row (Z1 to Z3). Accordingly, the third symbol display device 81 displays a total of nine third symbols of 3 rows × 3 columns. Here, the upper symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers corresponding to the main symbol row appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbol appear in ascending order. ing.

  Five effective lines are set on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, five lines of a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right rising line L4, and a left rising line L5 are set as effective lines.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 (wins) and a variation display is performed that scrolls in a predetermined variation direction (lateral direction X in this embodiment), the variation display is performed after a predetermined variation time. The upper symbol sequence Z1 → the lower symbol sequence Z3 → the middle symbol sequence Z2 are stopped in this order. At this time, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) stops on one of the active lines, a jackpot is generated, and a jackpot video (a jackpot effect is produced during the jackpot game). ) Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the changing direction (scrolling direction) is the horizontal direction X, but the changing direction may be the vertical direction (that is, the direction orthogonal to the horizontal direction X). When the change direction is the vertical direction (vertical scroll), the effective lines are the upper line (Z1 line in FIG. 5), the middle line (Z2 line in FIG. 5), and the lower line (Z3 line in FIG. 5). ), The right-up line L4 and the up-left line L5 may be used. In the case of vertical scrolling, for example, the variable display is stopped in the order of left symbol row L1 '→ right symbol row L3 → middle symbol row L2.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 110 controls the operation of the entire pachinko machine 10, and sends various commands to sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117, and controls the operation of the sub-control device. To do. Various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction. Note that a command indicating the state of the sub control device may be transmitted from the sub control device to the main control device 110.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2, which will be described later, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. . FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of each counter.

  The reserved ball storage area, the counter buffer, the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, CINI1 to CINI2, and the like are used for jackpot determination, display setting of the first symbol display device 37, and display of the second symbol display unit 83. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform a lottery of the results.

  For the jackpot lottery or display setting of the first symbol display device 37, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the first hit type symbol counter C2 used for the jackpot symbol selection, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 used for variation pattern selection are used. The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display unit 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each time these counters are updated, 1 is added to the previous value and a loop counter that returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each of these counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 is at an interval of 4 ms, which is an execution interval of the main process (see FIG. 9), or at an interval of 2 ms, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer provided in a work area (not shown) of the RAM 203. When executing the various control programs, when the values of the counters C1 to C4, CS1 to CS3, and CINI1 to CINI2 are referred to, the values of the counters stored in the counter buffer are referred to. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area is a memory for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 in accordance with the winning timing when the ball wins (wins) the first entrance 64. In this reserved ball storage area, four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) are stored so that the data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the ball winning timing can be stored up to four times. ) And one execution area referred to in the change start process (see FIG. 12).

  In each of the four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) in the holding ball storage area, an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type counter C2 are stored. And an area for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. In the present embodiment, three areas in which the values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored are provided in each reserved area in one reserved ball storage area, but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided. These three areas may be divided into a plurality of reserved ball storage areas and stored. For example, a part (one or two areas) of three areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 is provided in one of the two reserved ball storage areas, and the remaining areas are provided. You may comprise so that it may provide in the other holding ball storage area.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball has won the first entrance 64 can be stored up to four times. In the case of storing the data of the times, the data in order from the area with the smaller area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) Is memorized. That is, the data corresponding to the winnings that are older in time are stored in the reserved area having a smaller area number. Therefore, data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the reserved first area.

  The execution area in the reserved ball storage area includes an area for storing the value of the first random number counter C1, an area for storing the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. An area for storage is provided. In a variation process (see FIG. 10) described later, data (values of the counters C1 to C3) stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area are referred to after being shifted to the execution area. Based on this, the lottery result is determined. Then, the change display and the stop display corresponding to the lottery result are performed on the first symbol display device 37 or the like.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 738, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 738), it returns to 0. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first per-random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 738), and executes timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 13). It is updated once every time and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the stored ball is stored in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. The area is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area having the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In the present embodiment, the number of random number values that are jackpots is set to two types, a low probability (a state where the jackpot probability is normal) and a high probability (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal). There are two types of random numbers that are big hits at a low probability (when the big hit probability is normal), and the values are “373, 727”. On the other hand, there are 13 types of random numbers that are jackpots at a high probability (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual), and the values are “59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 367, 421, 479, 523. , 631, 683, 733 ". It should be noted that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not a big hit is obtained from the value (random number value) of the first random number counter C1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The first hit type counter C2 is a counter for determining the big hit type. In the present embodiment, the jackpot types determined by the first jackpot type counter C2 include a jackpot that is in a high probability state after the jackpot ends (probable variation jackpot) and a jackpot that is in a low probability state after the jackpot ends (normal jackpot). Yes, one of these two types of jackpot types is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 obtained at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64.

  In the present embodiment, the first hit type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 4, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 4), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process in FIG. 13 described later), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. , Stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203, more specifically, the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area. In this embodiment, the value of the random number that becomes a jackpot that becomes a high probability state after the jackpot ends (probability jackpot) is “1, 2, 3”, and the jackpot that becomes a low probability state after the jackpot ends (normal jackpot) The value of the random number that becomes “0” is “0, 4”. A table that stores random values for determining whether the jackpot that will be in a high probability state after the jackpot end or the jackpot that will be in a low probability state after the jackpot end is determined from the value (random value) of the first hit type counter C2 (see FIG. (Not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  In the present embodiment, among the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64, it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first random number counter C1. In addition, when it is determined based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 that “the jackpot that will be in a high probability state after the jackpot ends”, the jackpot becomes “probable change jackpot”. On the other hand, when it is determined as “big hit” based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and “hits that become a low probability state after the big hit ends” based on the value of the first hit type counter C2, The jackpot is a “normal jackpot”.

  Therefore, based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the value of the first per-type counter C2, a display mode corresponding to two types of big hits (probability big hit or normal big hit), and one type of display corresponding to losing One of the three display modes in total with the mode is selected as the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  In the present embodiment, the “probable jackpot” is the jackpot probability of the first symbol after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds until the next jackpot (probable jackpot or normal jackpot). The jackpot is a jackpot (16 rounds probable jackpot) that shifts to a high probability state (a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than usual) and increases the hit probability of the second symbol.

  In addition, after the “normal jackpot” in the present embodiment and the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 16 rounds, the jackpot probability of the first symbol shifts to a low probability state (the jackpot probability is a normal state), and the predetermined number of fluctuations Is a jackpot (15R normal jackpot) in which only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased only during the period (in this embodiment, 100 fluctuations).

  In the present embodiment, when the “normal jackpot” is reached, the winning probability of the second symbol is increased for a predetermined number of fluctuations. Instead, the next jackpot lottery is performed. Until the result is determined, the second symbol hit probability may be continuously increased.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum number of rounds of “probability jackpot” or “ordinary jackpot” is 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to 16 rounds, but various values (for example, 7 rounds, 15 rounds, etc.) ).

  In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpot” are both 16 rounds, but the maximum number of rounds is different for “probability jackpot” and “normal jackpot”. May be. For example, the maximum number of rounds for “probable jackpot” may be 16 rounds, and the maximum number of rounds for “normal jackpots” may be 7 rounds.

  Further, in this embodiment, when “probable big hit” is set, the winning probability of the second symbol is increased until the next jackpot lottery result is determined. The hit probability of the second symbol may be increased only during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

  The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the effect pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reaching, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stopped. “Rear out of front / rear” (for example, in the range of 0 to 8), and “Leach other than out of front / rear out of reach” (for example, in the range of 9 to 38) after the occurrence of reach, and the final stop symbol is stopped before and after the reach symbol. Three stop patterns (a mode of a display result of dynamic display) are selected as “completely out” (for example, a range of 39 to 238) in which reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. More specifically, it is stored in the corresponding area in the empty reserved area with the smallest area number in the reserved ball storage area.

  Note that a table (not shown) referred to for selecting a stop pattern from the value (random value) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Selection is made based on this table and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Note that such a table is provided with a plurality of tables so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 that can take one stop pattern is different. This is because the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), the number of special figure holding balls This is because the selection ratio of each stop pattern is changed according to N or the like.

  For example, in a high-probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), since the jackpot is likely to occur, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is 10 so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. A table as wide as ˜238 is selected, and “completely out” is easily selected. In this table, the range of random values for “front / rear out of reach” is narrowed to 0-5, and the range of random values for “non-front / rear out of reach” is also narrowed to 6-9. It becomes difficult to select “reach other than miss”.

  In addition, in order to secure the time for entering the ball to the first entrance 64 if each random number value is not stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area in a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal). In addition, a table having a narrow random value range of 51 to 238 corresponding to the stop pattern of “completely out” is selected, and it is difficult to select “completely out”. In this table, the range of random values of “rear out of front / rear out” is 0 to 8, the range of random values of “reach other than out of front / rear out” is as wide as 9 to 50, and “reach other than out of front / rear out” is easily selected. It has become. Therefore, in the low probability state (the state where the big hit probability is normal), it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64, and therefore, the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is easily performed continuously. .

  Next, among the three variation type counters CS1 to CS3, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 will be described. One variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The other variation type counter CS2 Within the range of 0 to 240, 1 is added in order, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 240), it returns to 0. In the following description, CS1 may be referred to as a “first variation type counter” and CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”.

  The first variation type counter CS1 is a counter used for selecting (selecting) a variation display (dynamic display) pattern (variation pattern) of the third symbol. The value of the first variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the present embodiment, three types of variation patterns of normal variation, normal reach variation, and super reach variation are set as variation patterns that can be selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Each variation pattern selected based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 is configured to have different production times (variation times).

  Among these fluctuation patterns, the “normal fluctuation” is a fluctuation pattern (that is, a deviation fluctuation) in which the display result of the loss appears without the reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 11 seconds.

  “Normal reach variation” is a so-called normal reach variation pattern with reach display. In the present embodiment, “normal reach fluctuation” is configured as a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time of 20 seconds.

  “Super reach fluctuation” is a reach pattern in which a predetermined effect appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol. In the present embodiment, the “super reach variation” is configured as a variation pattern with a variation time of 40 seconds. In addition, as a predetermined effect that appears between the occurrence of reach and the stop of the final symbol in “super reach fluctuation”, a specific character appears, a specific background display, For example, the symbols may be changed in a specific manner (for example, the symbols may be enlarged or reduced, or the symbols may fluctuate and fluctuate).

  When selecting a variation pattern from the value (random number value) of the first variation type counter CS1, a first selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is selected and referenced. This first selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop symbol (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or, each reach) is different in each first selection table, and the allocation of the range of the first variation type counter CS1 to the variation pattern is different. That is, the selection probability of the variation pattern differs for each first selection table.

  On the other hand, in the reach pattern (in this embodiment, normal reach or super reach), the second variation type counter CS2 is a variation pattern from when a symbol other than the final stop symbol stops and a reach occurs, to when the final stop symbol stops. It is a counter for determining the number. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 9) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process.

  In the following description, the number of fluctuation symbols determined based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 until the final stop symbol stops after occurrence of reach may be simply referred to as “fluctuation symbol number”. That is, in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence after the symbol (left symbol) of the left symbol column Z1 and the symbol (right symbol) of the right symbol column Z3 are stopped in the normal reach according to the value of the second variation type counter CS2. The number of change symbols until the Z2 symbol (medium symbol) stops is determined.

  A second selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 is used to determine the number of fluctuation symbols from the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 (random number value) until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. Is selected and referenced. The second selection table includes a jackpot type (probability big hit or normal jackpot) determined by the value of the first hit type counter C2, and a stop pattern (completely missed, missed before and after reach) determined by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Or the range of the second variation type counter CS2 is different in each variation pattern selection table with respect to the number of variation symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the occurrence of reach. . That is, according to the second selection table, the selection probability of the number of changing symbols until the final stop symbol stops after the reach occurs differs.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the type of the fluctuation pattern based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, and based on the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, the last stop symbol is stopped after the reach occurs. Determine the number of fluctuating symbols. That is, the first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough symbol variation mode such as a reach type such as normal reach, and the second variation type counter CS2 further refines a symbol such as normal reach A, normal reach B, or the like. A variation aspect is determined. That is, by combining the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, a wide variety of variation display can be easily realized.

  Next, the variation type counter CS3 will be described. For example, the value of the variation type counter CS3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 162, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 162). In the following description, CS3 is referred to as a “third variation type counter”.

  The third variation type counter CS3 is a counter for selecting an effect pattern of the notice effect. In other words, the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment slides the fluctuating symbol (so-called “slip effect”) or returns the symbol (so-called “return effect”) in addition to the variation of the third symbol. Since a notice effect such as passing a notice character for notifying the occurrence of the reach effect can be performed, the effect pattern of the notice effect is selected by the variation type counter CS3. Specifically, in order to shorten the time required for the notice effect to add to the variable time (for example, +0.5 seconds, +1 second, +2 seconds, etc.) An effect pattern in which the variation time is subtracted (for example, −1 second) or an effect pattern in which the variation time is not added or subtracted is selected.

  That is, based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3, the effect time addition / subtraction value is determined. By adding or subtracting the effect time addition / subtraction value determined based on the value of the third variation type counter CS3 to the variation time determined based on the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the first symbol or the third symbol The variation time of the variation display (that is, the variation time from the start of the variation display of the symbol to the stop of the final stop symbol) is determined. Therefore, in addition to the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the variation display can be further diversified by combining the variation type counter CS3.

  As in the case of the stop pattern selection counter C3 described above, the variation type counter CS3 also has a different range of effect patterns for the notice effect selected for the value of the variation type counter CS3 (random value). A plurality of tables are provided. That is, whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is higher than normal), a low probability state (a state where the jackpot probability is normal), Tables with different selection ratios of the production patterns are provided. Such a table (not shown) is provided in the ROM 202 similarly to the above-described variation type counters CS1 and CS2.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, for example, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is periodically updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13), and the second entrance 67 (through gate) on either the left or right side of the ball. Acquired when it is detected that the image has passed. There are 149 types of random numbers to be selected, and the range is “5 to 153”. Note that a table (not shown) that stores a random number value for determining whether or not to win from the value of the second random number counter C4 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 9).

  Returning again to FIG. In addition to the counters and flags described above, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 9), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 8) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 constituted by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an effect control device 117, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 82, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a first entrance switch 208a. And various switches 208 including a switch group or a sensor group (not shown), and a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening / closing the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a, a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the like. It is connected.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  Similarly to the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the RAM 213 stores a stack area for storing the contents of internal registers of the MPU 211, a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 211, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213. Note that the NMI interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 111 is the same processing as the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) executed by the main control device 110.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a touch sensor (not shown) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and a stop switch for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The effect control device 117 sets the sound output in the sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, sets the number of lamps to be turned on in the special figure holding lamp 85, and turns on the lamps in the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34. In addition, it controls the setting of turning off and on, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 and the jackpot effect.

  The effect control device 117 includes an MPU 271, an image controller 274, a character ROM 275, a video RAM 276, an input / output port 277, an output port 278, and bus lines 279 and 280.

  In addition, the effect control device 117 stores the power supplied from the power supply device 115 and supplies a backup voltage to the RAM 273 (backup) when the power supply from the power supply device 115 is cut off (that is, the power supply is cut off). Power supply) 281. Therefore, the RAM 273 can retain (back up) the stored contents by the backup voltage supplied from the backup capacitor 281 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off.

  An input / output port 277 is connected to the MPU 271 which is an arithmetic unit via a bus line 279 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 277 includes a main controller 110, an image controller 274, an audio output device 226, illumination units 29 to 33 and a display lamp 34, a special figure holding lamp 85, a back mode switch 75, a frame A button 22 is connected.

  A character ROM 275 and a video RAM 276 are connected to the image controller 274, and an output port 278 is connected via a bus line 280. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 278. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probabilities and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the production control device 117 is made a common part to reduce the cost.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control device 117 collectively performs control of sound output, control of turning on and off various lamps, and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81. However, it may be configured such that various controls are shared by a plurality of control devices. For example, control of voice output and control of lighting and extinguishing of various lamps are performed by a dedicated control device (voice lamp control device), and control of variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 is performed. A dedicated control device (display control device) may be used.

  The MPU 271 is an arithmetic unit as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 271 includes a ROM 272 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 271 and fixed value data, and various circuits such as a RAM 273 used as a work memory.

  The RAM 273 includes a mode selection counter 273a, a mode stay time counter 273b, a changing flag 273c, a customer waiting effect flag 273d, a mode change enable flag 273e, a changing mode change flag 273f, and a changing variable timing target change. It has a flag 273g, a first mode total stay time memory 273h, a second mode total stay time memory 273i, and a third mode total stay time memory 273j.

  The mode selection counter 273a is a counter for setting an effect mode selected or instructed by the frame button 22 or the back mode switch 75 among the three types of effect modes (first to third effect modes). This mode selection counter 273a is a loop counter in the range of 0 to 2, each time the frame button 22 is operated at an effective or appropriate timing (in the present embodiment, during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect). One is added, and after reaching the maximum value (“2” in the present embodiment), it returns to zero. When the power is turned on, a value corresponding to the position of the knob 75a of the back mode switch 75 is set in the mode selection counter 273a.

  The mode stay time counter 273b is a counter for measuring the time (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “mode stay time”) in which the player has played a game in the effect mode according to the value of the mode selection counter 273a. In the present embodiment, the mode stay time counter 273b counts the time of the change display executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the effect mode according to the value of the mode selection counter 273a as the “mode stay time”. ) Is configured to.

  The changing flag 273c is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being executed on the third symbol display device 81 (that is, changing). When the changing flag 273c is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that it is changing, and when it is set to OFF (that is, “0”), the change is stopped. Indicates that it is inside. The changing flag 273c is turned off as the initial value when the power is turned on, then turned on with the start of the change display, and turned off with the end of the change display.

  The customer waiting effect flag 273d is a flag indicating whether or not the third symbol display device 81 is in the customer waiting effect. The “customer waiting effect” is a display unrelated to the gaming state displayed on the 3rd symbol gaming device 81 when the 3rd symbol display device 81 does not display the variable display or the video display during the big hit game. Production (for example, title display or demonstration display). When the customer waiting effect flag 273c is set to on (that is, “1”), it indicates that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and when it is set to off (that is, “0”). , Indicating that the customer waiting effect is not being performed (that is, changing or jackpot). The customer waiting effect flag 273d is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on. Then, the customer waiting effect flag 273d is set to ON when the state in which the special figure holding ball number N is 0 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) or more after the end of the variable display. Is set off with the start of (i.e., the end of the customer waiting effect).

  The mode changeable flag 273e is a flag indicating whether or not it is time (in the present embodiment, high-speed change is possible) when the effect mode can be changed by the frame button 22 during change (during change display). If the mode change enable flag 273e is set to ON (that is, “1”), it indicates that the stage mode can be changed by the frame button 22 during the change (ie, during high-speed change). When it is off (that is, “0”), it indicates that it is time when the effect mode cannot be changed by the frame button 22 during the change. The mode change enable flag 273e is set to OFF during initial high speed fluctuation after being set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is set to OFF during times other than high speed fluctuation.

  The changing mode change flag 273f is a flag indicating whether or not the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the frame button 22 during high-speed changing. When the changing mode change flag 273f is set to ON (that is, “1”), it is confirmed that the effect mode in the changing display is changed by operating the frame button 22 during high speed changing. Show. The changing mode change flag 273f is set to ON when the frame button 22 is operated during high-speed change after being set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then the change display is performed. Is turned off when is finished.

  The variable timekeeping target change flag 273g indicates that the target of time measurement by the mode stay time counter 273b is the current effect mode (that is, the mode) when the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 during high speed change. This is a flag indicating whether or not the display mode has been changed to an effect mode corresponding to the value of the selection counter 273a. When the variable timekeeping target change flag 273g is set to ON (that is, “1”), the time measurement target of the mode stay time counter 273b is changed in accordance with the change of the effect mode during the high speed change. It shows that. The changing timekeeping target change flag 273g is set to ON when the timekeeping target is changed by operating the frame button 22 during high speed fluctuation after being set to OFF (that is, “0”) as an initial value when the power is turned on. Is done. After that, when the change display ends, or when the frame button 22 is operated again during the high-speed change, the change intermediate time target change flag 273g is turned off.

  The first mode total stay time memory 273h is a memory for accumulating and storing values measured by the mode stay time counter 273b in the first effect mode. Similarly, the second mode stay time memory 273i is a memory for accumulating and storing the value measured by the mode stay time counter 273b in the second effect mode, and the third effect mode stay time memory 273j is This is a memory for accumulating and storing values counted by the mode stay time counter 273b in the third effect mode.

  These mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are excluded from the initialization and initial value setting of the RAM 273 when the power is turned on. That is, the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j can accumulate and store the mode stay time from the time when the production control device 170 is shipped (the state cleared to 0) until it is discarded.

  As described above, the value (mode stay time) counted by the mode stay time counter 273b reflects the length of time that the player actually played in the set effect mode, and for each effect mode. This value reflects the player's support level. Therefore, the value of each mode total stay time memory 273h to 273j stored and stored in the mode stay time indicates the tendency of the player's support for each effect mode. Can be used to select a production mode to be performed (that is, a production mode that is initially set after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on).

  In addition, conventionally, there is only a subjective determination method based on a player's reputation or the like as a method for determining which one of the plurality of performance modes set for the pachinko machine is supported. There was a problem of lacking. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode stay time in each effect mode can be accumulated and stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j. Since the value reflecting the player's support for the mode can be objectively obtained, it can also be used as useful data for future game machine development.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the backup voltage supplied from the backup capacitor 281 causes the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j to be stored for a plurality of days (maximum after the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured). It is possible to accumulate mode stay time over a period until it is discarded. As the accumulation period in each mode total stay time memory 273h to 273 becomes longer, the value of each mode total stay time memory 273h to 273 clearly indicates the player's support for each effect mode (ie, information Therefore, it is possible to obtain data that is very useful in future game machine development.

  The RAM 273 is a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 271, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 271, and a work area for storing various flags, counters, and I / O values. (Working area). Further, the RAM 273 has various memories, flags, counters, and the like in addition to the above.

  The image controller 274 adjusts the timing of the character ROM 275, the video RAM 276, the input / output port 277, and the output port 278 based on the internal command received from the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117, and intervenes in reading and writing data. Data stored in the RAM 276 is read at a predetermined timing, a frame-by-frame variation display image is generated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 275 is a memory in which data for effects such as symbols (third symbols and decorative symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in a compressed form. The character ROM 275 stores various data for effects used for, for example, variable display (variable effects) and jackpot effects. The variable display data (variable display data) stored in the character ROM 275 is composed of the character design data of the third design, the data for the background image, the data for the notice character design, and the like. The fluctuation display data stored in the character ROM 275 is prepared for each effect mode (that is, the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the third effect mode), and the change pattern received from the main control means. The image controller 274 reads the fluctuation display data corresponding to the command and the value of the mode selection counter 173a.

  The character ROM 275 stores the data for presentation as described above in a compressed state in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the production data is composed of approximately 1024 Mbytes, and the approximately 1024 Mbytes of data is compressed to approximately 768 Mbytes and stored in the character ROM 275. Only the necessary data for presentation (production data) compressed and stored in the character ROM 275 is read and decompressed, and then written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276.

  The video RAM 276 is a memory for storing effect data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a decompressed state (a state where it can be used immediately). The video RAM 276 has a variable display data storage area (not shown). This variable display data storage area (not shown) is a memory for storing data for performing variable display (variable effect) and jackpot effect in the third symbol display device 81, and each effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. When started, the data stored in the fluctuating effect data storage area is sequentially read out by the image controller 274 according to time to generate a fluctuating display image in units of frames.

  The various data is read from the character ROM 275 and stored in the variable effect data storage area because the processing speed of the RAM is generally higher than that of the ROM. For example, when the presentation data is read from the character ROM 275 and displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, if the amount of data to be read is large, it takes time to read, and smooth display is not possible or clear. This is because the display may not be possible. This is also because the processing of the display data (for example, changing the size of the decorative design or changing the color of the background design) is easier when stored in the RAM.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And a switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15), store the information on the occurrence of power interruption in the RAM 203 and the RAM 213, and complete it.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 clear the respective backup data and the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data. A payout initialization command is transmitted to the payout control device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 having the above configuration will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing of the MPU 201 includes a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a timer interrupt process that is periodically started (in a 2 ms cycle in this embodiment). And activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal, and are roughly divided into NMI interrupt processing.

  First, referring to FIG. 8, a startup process when the main controller 110 is turned on will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S101). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in advance in the stack pointer and waits for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the effect control device 117 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. Therefore, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. Next, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S104). If it is turned on (S104: Yes), the process proceeds to S111. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S105), and if not stored (S105: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown has not been completed normally, the process proceeds to S111 also in this case.

  If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), a RAM determination value is calculated (S106). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM determination is performed. If the value does not match the RAM determination value stored when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process moves to S111 even in such a case. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S213 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S111, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S111). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S112, S113) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S112, S113) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S112, S113) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S112, S113), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S112), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S113). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S112, S113), the process proceeds to S110.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S104: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of driving power interruption is transmitted (S109), and the process proceeds to S110. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213. In the process of S110, the interruption is permitted and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S201 to S206 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S209 and S210 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, output data such as a command updated in the previous processing is transmitted (output) to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub-side, or the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal board 260. (S201). By this external output process (S201), for example, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S501 (see FIG. 13) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the number of acquired balls to the payout control device 111 A prize ball command corresponding to is sent. In addition, by this external output process (S201), a variation pattern command, a type command, a stop command, an effect time addition / subtraction command, and the like necessary for the third symbol display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the effect control device 117. When a ball is fired, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  After the process of S201, each value of the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 is updated (S202). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counters CS1, CS2 and CS3 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S203), and the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. A variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol and the like by the three symbol display device 81 is executed (S204). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the end of the variation process, the jackpot process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed in the case of the jackpot state (S205). Specifically, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and then a predetermined time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, or a predetermined number (the number of books) is set in the specific winning opening 65a. In the embodiment, when 10 balls have entered, the process of closing the specific winning opening 65a is a process of repeatedly executing a predetermined number of rounds (16 rounds in the present embodiment).

  Next, a display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol “◯” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 82 is executed (S206). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 82 is obtained. In the display unit 83, the second symbol variation display is performed. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S207: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208). If the predetermined time has already passed (S208: Yes), the process proceeds to S201, and the processes after S201 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S208: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 is repeatedly executed (S209, S210).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S209). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding areas in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Next, the fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 are updated (S210). Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the update values of the variation type counters CS 1, CS 2 and CS 3 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S201-S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second per-random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, and CS3 can be updated at random.

  In the process of S207, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S207: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) has been executed, the power-off process after S211 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S211), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the effect control device 117). Transmit (S212). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S213), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S214), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S207 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S201 to S206 is completed, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S209 and S210 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can start from the process of S201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S201 as in the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at power-off, the stack pointer is not stored in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S201. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the variation process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the variation process (S204) executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). In the variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S302: No), the value of a special figure reservation ball counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203, that is, the number N of special figure reservation balls is acquired (S303). After the process of S303, it is determined whether or not the special figure holding ball number N is larger than 0 (S304).

  At this time, if the number of special figure holding balls N> 0 (S304: Yes), the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the holding ball storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is stored. A reservation ball storage area forward process for sequentially shifting to the execution area side is executed (S305). Detailed processing executed in the reserved ball storage area forward processing (S305) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), the fluctuation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S306), and the fluctuation process (S204) is terminated. The detailed process executed in the change start process (S306) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of checking in the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), a special figure control timer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed by referring to (S307). A special figure control timer (not shown) is a timer that manages the time from the start of change to the end of change. The display time during the change of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counters CS1 and CS2 and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time selected by the change type counter CS3. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S307: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S308).

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Here, the stop symbol displayed by the stop display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 as to whether or not it is a big hit. Furthermore, for the jackpot stop symbol, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop symbol when the jackpot is in a high probability state after the jackpot (that is, the probability variation jackpot) and the case of a low probability state after the jackpot (that is, , Usually a big jackpot) stop symbol. For example, if it is a probability variation big hit, a blue LED is turned on as a stop symbol, and if it is a second probability variation big hit, a red LED is turned on as a stop symbol. On the other hand, when the lottery result (value of the first random number counter C1) is out of the range, the red LED and the green LED are turned on as a stop symbol. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  Note that the variation process is executed every 4 ms, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S307: Yes), the stop display is set to end (stop) the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37. (S309) After setting the stop command to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the 3rd symbol display device 81 with the lighting of the LED in the 1st symbol display device 37 (S310), the fluctuation processing (S204) is finished, the main processing Return to FIG. When receiving the stop command set in S310, the effect control device 117 ends the 1 variable display being executed in the third symbol display device 81.

  As a result of the determination in S304, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 (S304: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting effect standby flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is on. (S311). At this time, if the customer waiting effect waiting flag is off (S311: No), the customer waiting effect waiting flag is turned on (S312), and the timing of the customer waiting effect waiting time is started using a counter (not shown) (S313). Then, the variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9). In addition, when the time measurement by a counter (not shown) is started by the process of S313, this counter is updated every time a timer interrupt process (not shown) is periodically executed. The counter may be updated in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) described later.

  Further, as a result of the determination in S311, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) has elapsed since the start of time measurement in S313 (S314). If the predetermined time has not elapsed (S314: No) ) Since it is during the period of waiting for the execution of the customer waiting effect, the variation process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9).

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has passed as a result of the determination in S314 (S314: Yes), since it is the start timing of the customer waiting effect, a customer waiting effect command is set (S315), and the customer waiting effect is set. After turning off the standby flag (S316), the variation process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 9). When receiving the customer waiting effect command set in S315, the effect control device 117 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the customer waiting effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the above-described reserved ball storage area progressive process (S305) will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305) executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  In the reserved ball storage area forward process (S305), first, each data (first random number counter value, first hit type counter value, and stop pattern stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area) The value of the selection counter is shifted to the execution area (S351).

  Next, each data stored in the reserved second area to the reserved fourth area is shifted to an area having a smaller area number (S352). In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved area where data is stored (held) among the second to fourth reserved areas. Therefore, since a data shift process is not performed for a reserved area in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced, and a control burden can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that each data of a 2nd-4th reserved area may be shifted to the area where an area number is 1 small irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the second to fourth reserved areas, the number of steps of the program can be reduced. Therefore, since the capacity of the program can be reduced, the free capacity of the ROM 202 can be increased.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure reservation ball counter (number N of special figure reservation balls) (S353), and a hold number command indicating the value of the special figure reservation ball counter after the subtraction is set (S354). The hold number command set by the process of S354 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 9). When the output hold number command is received by the effect control device 117, the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command are turned on in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new holding number is displayed in the lighting state (S355). The sphere storage area sequential feed process (S305) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  Next, the above-described change start process (S306) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S306) executed in the change process (see FIG. 10).

  In the variation start process (S306), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is made based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area (S401). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time.

  In the present embodiment, at the normal probability (low probability), if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 is “310” or “608”, it is determined as a big hit by the process of S401. On the other hand, when the probability is high, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 63, 90, 127, 154, 188, 210, 250, 278, 305, 343, 375, 400, 426, 471, 509, 535, 568, 598, 618 ", the jackpot is determined by the process of S401.

  If it is determined by the process of S401 that it is a big hit (S401: Yes), the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the big hit displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S402). Specifically, in S402, after determining the jackpot type (that is, the stop pattern at the time of jackpot) based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, the determined jackpot type Is set so that a display mode corresponding to the above is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In this embodiment, when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “1, 2, 3”, the big hit type is “probable big hit”, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0, 4”. ", The jackpot type is" normal jackpot ".

  After the process of S402, the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203 Based on the above, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403).

  That is, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a rough variation time is determined from the normal reach variation (20 seconds) and the super reach variation (40 seconds), and the second variation type counter CS2 Based on this value, the variation time (in other words, the number of variation symbols) until the last stop symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol (medium symbol) in the middle symbol row Z2) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S403, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol is determined. .

  Note that the above-described variation time can be set using only the value of the first variation type counter CS1 without using the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and only by the value of the first variation type counter CS1. Whether to set the value or both values of the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be determined as appropriate according to the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the game conditions each time. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a big hit in the process of S401 (S401: No), the display mode (LED 37a lighting state) at the time of disconnection displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S408). Specifically, in S408, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a stop pattern at the time of detachment (rear / rear reach, reach other than front / rear reach, or complete disengagement) is determined. After that, setting is performed so that a display mode corresponding to the determined stop symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37.

  After the processing of S408, the stop pattern at the time of deviation indicated by the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1, CS2 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203 The fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined based on the value of (S409).

  That is, in the same manner as the processing of S403 described above, based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1, the rough variation (11 seconds), normal reach variation (20 seconds), super reach variation (40 seconds) is roughly selected. In addition to determining the variation time of the symbol variation, the variation time until the final stop symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol row Z2 (medium symbol)) stops after the occurrence of reach is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2. decide. By determining the variation pattern by the processing of S409, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. .

  In the process of S408, when “front / rear out of reach” or “reach other than front / rear out of reach” is set as the display mode at the time of release, reach fluctuation (normal reach fluctuation, super reach fluctuation) is always determined by the process of S409. As shown, the table is preset.

  After the process of S403 or S409, the effect time (addition / subtraction value of effect time) to be added to or subtracted from the variation time determined by these processes is determined (S404). At this time, the effect time to be added or subtracted is determined based on the value of the third type counter CS3 stored in the counter buffer provided in the work area (not shown) in the RAM 203.

  After the processing of S404, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the processing of S403 or S409 is set (S405), and then the display mode set by the processing of S402 or S408 (ie, stop) Set the type command according to the symbol. (S408). Thereafter, an effect time addition / subtraction command corresponding to the effect time addition / subtraction value determined in the process of S404 is set (S407), the fluctuation start process (S306) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation process (see FIG. 10).

  As described above, after the “holding number command” is set in the reserved ball storage area forward process (see FIG. 11), the “variation pattern command” and “type” are set in the change start process (see FIG. 12). Commands are set in the order of “command” and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”. In the external output process (S201) in the main process (see FIG. 9), since the commands are output in the order in which the commands are set, when the 3rd symbol display device 81 starts the variable display of the 3rd symbol. The commands are output to the effect control device 117 in the order of “pending number command”, “variation pattern command”, “type command”, and “calculation time addition / subtraction command”.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, for example, every 2 ms. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S501). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S502). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (738 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding area of the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Further, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are updated (S503). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, , 619, 15, 238, 250), respectively, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding area in the counter buffer in the RAM 203.

  Thereafter, a start winning process is performed in accordance with winning at the first entrance 64 (S504), a firing control process is performed (S505), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with a touch sensor (not shown), and confirms that a stop switch (not shown) for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process for determining on / off of the launch of the sphere as a condition. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Here, the start winning process (S504) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S504) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

  When this start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a first winning opening 64 (start winning) (S601). If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (S601: Yes), whether or not the special figure holding ball number N of the first symbol display device 37 is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Is determined (S602).

  At this time, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 and the number of special figure holding balls N <4 (S602: Yes), the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type updated in step S503 The values of the counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 203 (S603).

  Next, 1 is added to the value of the special figure holding ball counter (not shown), that is, the special figure holding ball number N (S604), and a holding number command indicating the value of the special figure holding ball number counter after the addition is issued. Setting is made (S605). The hold number command set by the process of S605 is output to the effect control device 117 by the external output process of S201 executed in the main process (see FIG. 9). Upon receiving the hold number command, the effect control device 117 turns on the same number of lamps as the special figure hold ball number N indicated by the hold number command in the special figure hold lamp 85.

  Next, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on in accordance with the value of the special figure holding ball counter (the number N of special figure holding balls), and the new number of holdings is displayed in the lighting state (S606). The winning process (S504) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

  On the other hand, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S601: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number of reserved special figure balls N <4 is not satisfied (S602: No) ), S603 and S604 are skipped, the start winning process (S504) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 by the execution of the NMI interruption process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 23, each control process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described. As processing of the MPU 271, startup processing activated upon power-on, main processing executed after the startup processing, and commands executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. Roughly divided into reception interrupt processing.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This start-up process is a process for performing various initial settings of the effect control device 117, and is a process that is executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on or when the MPU 271 is reset.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting associated with power-on is performed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, a power-on notification process is executed (S1002). This power-on notification process (S1002) is a notification for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. This is performed by the decoration units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the like.

  After the power-on notification process (S1002) is executed, in order to display the initial screen on the third symbol display device 81, first, effect data (or image data) corresponding to the initial screen is read from the character ROM 275, and the video is displayed. The data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 276 (S1003). Then, using the effect data, an initial screen is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1004).

  Next, the power supply provided in the RAM 273 indicates whether the current startup process is executed because the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 17) described later. It is determined whether or not a disconnection processing flag (not shown) is turned on (S1005).

  As described above, when an instantaneous voltage drop (instant blackout, so-called “instantaneous power failure”) occurs, main controller 110 transmits a power-off command to effect controller 117 and the like. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110, the effect control device 117 stores the power-off occurrence information indicating that the power-off command has been received in the RAM 273. Then, power-off processing (see S1109 in FIG. 17) is executed. The power-off process in progress flag is turned on before the power-off process and turned off after the power-off process is completed.

  That is, whether or not the MPU 271 is reset during the power-off process can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag. It should be noted that data in the RAM 273 is lost during the execution of the power-off process or when the power supply is completely shut down after the completion of the execution. In this case, the power-off process flag is turned off.

  More specifically, the case where the power-off process in progress flag is off is a case where the current startup process is executed after one of the following three states is entered. The first state is a state where the power supply is completely shut off. When the power is completely shut down, the data in the RAM 273 is lost, so that the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  As a second state, a power interruption process (see S1109 in FIG. 17) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power supply was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the power interruption process was completed. This is a state where the MPU 271 is reset. In this case, since the power is not shut off, the data in the RAM 273 is retained without loss. Further, since the power-off process is completed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off.

  The third state is a state in which only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like. In other words, if the MPU 271 is reset without executing the power-off process (without receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110), the data in the RAM 273 is held while the power-off process in progress flag remains off. Is done.

  If the current startup process is executed after any of the three states described above, that is, if the power-off flag is off (S1005: No), whether or not the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed is determined. Confirm (S1006). Note that whether or not the data has been destroyed is that the data in the RAM 273 is normally held when only the MPU 271 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued using the data.

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 273 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 described later. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 273. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 273 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 273 is confirmed (S1006: Yes), the process proceeds to S1007, and initialization of the RAM 273 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 273 is not confirmed (S1006: No), the process proceeds to S1010.

  More specifically, when the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 273 (the RAM 273 is turned off when the power is turned off). Since the memory is lost), it is determined that the data in the RAM 273 has been destroyed (S1006: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1007. On the other hand, the power cut-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 17) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power was not cut off and returned to normal, and then the MPU 271 was reset after the execution of the power cut-off process was completed. Thus, when the current startup process is started or after the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, the current startup process is started. Since the keyword “55AAh” is stored, the data in the RAM 273 is determined to be normal (S1006: No), and the process proceeds to S1010.

  In the process of S1005, when the power-off process flag is on (S1005: Yes), the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 17) was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred, but the power-off occurred. In this case, the MPU 271 is reset in the middle of executing the power-off process. In this case, the current storage state of the RAM 273 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since it is difficult to continue control in such a case, the process proceeds to S1007 and initialization of the RAM 273 is started.

  In the process of S1007, the entire storage area of the RAM 273 is checked (S1007), and it is determined whether the RAM 273 is normal based on the check result (S1008). As a check method performed in S1007, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. Determine. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 273 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 273 to zero.

  If an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 273, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 273 (S1008: No), the abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified (S1017), and the power is shut off. Loop endlessly. The abnormality of the RAM 273 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the RAM 273 of an abnormality. Moreover, you may comprise so that abnormality of RAM273 may be alert | reported on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG.

  On the other hand, if the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 273, it is determined that the RAM 273 is normal (S1008: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 273, and the RAM destruction check data Is set (S1009). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 273.

  After the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1010). The power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process (see S1109 in FIG. 17) is executed, and turned off when the power is completely shut off. Therefore, when the power-off flag is on when the startup process is executed, the power-off process was executed because an instantaneous power failure occurred. Or when the MPU 271 is reset upon completion of execution.

  Therefore, as a result of the confirmation in the process of S1010, when the power-off flag is on (S1010: Yes), the work area (work area) of the RAM 273 is cleared to initialize each process of the effect control device 117. (S1011). Of the contents stored in the RAM 273 in the processing of S1011, the contents stored in the first mode total stay time memory 273h, the second mode total stay time memory 273i, and the third mode total stay time memory 273j. Shall not be initialized. Next, an initial value of the RAM 273 is set (S1012). In the processing of S1012, the storage contents of the first mode total stay time memory 273h, the second mode total stay time memory 273i, and the third mode total stay time memory 273j are left as they are. After the process of S1012, the interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1014.

  On the other hand, the case where the power-off flag is off at the time of executing the start-up process means, for example, that the data in the RAM 273 including the data of the power-off flag is lost, or only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 due to noise or the like. Is reset and the power-off flag is not turned on (that is, no power-off command is received from the main controller 110).

  Therefore, as a result of checking in the process of S1010, if the power-off flag is turned off (S1010: No), the process of S1011 that is the work area clear process of the RAM 273 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1012. Is set (S1012), interrupt permission is set (S1013), and the process proceeds to S1014.

  Note that when the power-off flag is turned off, the clearing process of S1011 is skipped because only the MPU 271 of the effect control device 117 is reset due to noise or the like, and the start-up process is started. This is because the control of the effect control device 117 can be continued by storing the work area data. In addition, when the processing of S1007 to S1009 is executed, all the storage areas of the RAM 273 have already been cleared by the processing of S1007, so that it is not necessary to clear the work area of the RAM 273 again.

  In S1014, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is turned on (operated) (S1014). If the frame button 22 is turned on as a result of the determination in the process of S1014 (S1014: Yes), the total amount of time that the variable display was performed in each effect mode based on the value of each mode total stay time memory 273h to 273j. (Mode total stay time) is displayed as a numerical value on the third symbol display device 81 (S1015).

  Therefore, by operating the frame button 22 when the power is turned on (turning on the power while operating the frame button 22), the mode total stay time of each effect mode, which is a value indicating the player's support level for each effect mode, is obtained. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The employee of the hall confirms whether or not the back mode switch 75 designates an appropriate effect mode by referring to the mode total stay time of each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can do. As a result of the confirmation, if it is necessary to change the designation of the back mode switch 75, the knob 75a of the back mode switch 75 is operated so as to indicate an appropriate effect mode, and the power is turned on again. Can be set as a production mode at the start of business in the hall.

  After the process of S1015, the process proceeds to S1016. If the frame button 22 is not turned on as a result of the determination in the process of S1014 (S1014: No), the process of S1015 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1016. In S1016, the value indicated by the back mode switch 75 is set in the mode selection counter 273a (S1016). After the process of S1016, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the main process executed after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117. This main process is a process for executing control related to game effects (such as voice output and display), and is executed after the start-up process (see FIG. 16) of the above-described effect control device 117, and thereafter repeatedly. It is a process to be executed.

  In the main process, first, an effect mode change confirmation process for confirming whether or not to change the effect mode by operating the frame button 22 is executed (S1101). Details of the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After execution of the effect mode change confirmation processing (S1101), it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was performed (that is, since the processing of S1102 was performed last time) (S1102). When 1 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1102: Yes), an audio lamp effect process, which is a process for executing various lamp lighting control, audio output control, and the like, is executed (S1103). The process proceeds to S1104. Details of the sound lamp effect process (S1103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination as a result of the determination in S1102 (S1102: No), the process of S1103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1104. Note that when 1 ms has not elapsed since the previous determination was performed in the process of S1101, the process of the audio lamp effect process (S1103) is skipped in the audio lamp effect process (S1103). This is because it is not necessary to execute lamp lighting control and audio output control with a cycle shorter than 1 ms.

  In the process of S1104, it is determined whether or not 20 ms or more has elapsed since the previous determination was executed (that is, since the process of S1104 was executed last time) (S1104). At this time, when 20 ms or more have elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1104: Yes), a moving image (image) corresponding to the variation effect and a moving image (image) corresponding to the jackpot effect are displayed in the third symbol display. A display effect process, which is a process for displaying on the device (LCD) 81, is executed (S1105), and the process proceeds to S1106. Details of the display effect process (S1105) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1104, if 20 ms has not yet elapsed since the previous determination was executed (S1104: No), the process of S1105 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1106. Note that the display effect process (S1105) is skipped when the display effect process (S1105) has not passed 20 ms since the previous determination was executed in the process of S1104. This is because it is not necessary to execute such a process with a cycle shorter than 20 ms because the image to be displayed is updated according to the variation time.

  In the process of S1106, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 273 (S1106). The information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored when a power interruption command is received from main controller 110. If it is determined by the processing of S1106 that the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S1106: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1108), and the power interruption processing is performed. Execute (S1109). After executing the power-off process (S1109), the power-off process flag is turned off (S1110), and then the process is looped infinitely.

  In the power-off process of S1109, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the third symbol display device 81 are turned on. Turn off the output. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased. Each output port is turned off in order to prevent abnormal display and abnormal audio output from being performed. The player should not be confused by abnormal display or abnormal audio output. Because.

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination by the process of S1106, if the information on occurrence of power interruption is not stored (S1106: No), the keyword “55AAh” stored in the RAM 273 by the process of S1009 of the startup process (see FIG. 16) is stored. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the RAM 273 is destroyed (S1107). If the RAM 273 is not destroyed (S1107: No), the process returns to S1101, and the above-described processes of S1101 to S1107 are repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM 273 is destroyed by the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processes. Here, since it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the process is in an infinite loop, the display effect process (S1105) is not executed, and thereafter, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is not changed. Thus, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall clerk or the like to request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. When it is confirmed that the RAM 273 is destroyed, the audio output device 226, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, the special figure holding lamp 85, the screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It is good also as what performs notification of RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the above-described effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) of the effect control device 117.

  In the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101), first, it is confirmed whether the frame button 22 has been operated (S1201). If the frame button 22 has not been operated (S1201: No), the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) is performed. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated as a result of the confirmation in the processing of S1201 (S1201: Yes), it is determined whether the changing flag 273c is on (S1202). At this time, if the changing flag 273c is on (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether the mode changeable flag 273e is on (S1203).

  If the mode change enable flag 273e is off as a result of the determination in S1203 (S1203: No), the time when the effect mode can be changed by the frame button 22 even during the change (in this embodiment, high speed). In such a case, the production mode change confirmation process (S1101) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  On the other hand, if the mode change enable flag 273e is turned on as a result of the determination in S1203 (S1203: Yes), the period during which the effect mode can be changed by the frame button 22 during the change (in the present embodiment, the high speed change is in progress). Therefore, in this case, the changing mode change flag 273f is turned on (S1204), and the changing time keeping target change flag 273g is turned off (S1205).

  Then, after the process of S1205, the value of the mode selection counter 273a is updated (S1206), the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  On the other hand, if the changing flag 273 is OFF as a result of the determination in the process of S1202 (S1202: No), it is determined whether the customer waiting effect flag 273d is ON (S1207). At this time, if the customer waiting effect flag 273d is off (S1207: No), it is the time when the change of the effect mode is prohibited. In this case, the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  On the other hand, as a result of the determination in the processing of S1207, if the customer waiting effect flag 273d is on (S1207: Yes), the effect mode can be changed (permitted). Then, the process proceeds to S1206, the value of the mode selection counter 273a is updated (S1206), the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, according to the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101), the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated is determined by whether the mode change enable flag 273e is on (that is, during high-speed fluctuation) or the customer waiting effect flag 273d. If is on (that is, during the customer waiting effect), the value of the mode selection counter 273a is updated by the processing of S1206, thereby changing (switching) the effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ).

  Next, the above-described sound lamp effect process (S1103) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an audio lamp effect process (S1103) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) of the effect control device 117.

  In the audio lamp effect process (S1103), first, the output of each lamp (for example, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) is set so as to be in the lighting state of the lamp edited in the process of S1245 described later. (S1241).

  After the process of S1241, the number-of-holds display update process is executed (S1242). In the hold number display update process (S1242), the number of lighting of the special figure hold lamp 85 is updated based on the hold number command received from the main controller 110.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1243). In this frame button input monitoring / production process (S1243), the frame button 22 is monitored not for changing the production mode but for input whether or not the player has operated to enhance the production effect. This is a process of setting to produce an effect corresponding to the case where 22 inputs are confirmed. For example, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the feeling of expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. Change to a production you can have. If the frame button 22 is set as a button used only for changing the effect mode, the process of S1243 can be omitted.

  After executing the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1243), the lamp editing process is executed (S1244), and the sound editing / output process is executed (S1245). In the lamp editing process (S1244), the lighting pattern of the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process (S1245), the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting. .

  After the process of S1245, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1246), the sound lamp effect process (S1103) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 17). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1246), based on the variation pattern command transmitted and received from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. Based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process (S1246), the lamp editing process in S1244 and the sound editing / output process in S1245 are executed.

  Next, the display effect process (S1106) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the display effect process (S1105) executed in the main process (see FIG. 17) of the effect control device 117.

  In the display effect process (S1105), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 is an effect for jackpot (that is, whether or not it is a jackpot) (S1261). If it is medium (S1261: Yes), the jackpot effect process is executed (S1276). In this jackpot effect process, effect data corresponding to the jackpot effect performed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 275 and written in a predetermined area of the video RAM 276 to update the image of the jackpot effect. After the big hit effect process (S1274) ends, the display effect process (S1105) ends, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in the processing of S1261 (S1261: No), it is determined whether or not the 3rd symbol display device 81 is executing the variation display of the 3rd symbol (that is, whether or not it is changing). (S1262). At this time, if not changing (S1262: No), it is determined whether a change start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1263).

  The variation start flag (not shown) is a flag for instructing the start of variation display of the third symbol, and when it is determined in S1263 that the variation start flag is on, the variation display of the third symbol is started. . This variation start flag is set to ON when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see FIG. 23), and is set to OFF when starting the variation display of the third symbol.

  If the variation start flag is on as a result of the determination in S1263 (S1263: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1264), the customer waiting effect flag 273d is turned off (S1265), and the variation flag 273c is set. It is turned on (S1266).

  After the process of S1266, an initial value is set in a variable time counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S1267), and the mode stay time counter 273b is cleared (0 cleared) (S1268). Note that a variation time counter (not shown) is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of variation display of the third symbol. Note that the initial value set in the variation time counter in S1267 is the time obtained from the variation time of the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the addition / subtraction value of the effect time indicated by the effect time addition / subtraction command.

  After the processing of S1268, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation time counter is greater than 0, that is, whether or not it is within the variation time (S1269). On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1268 is that the variation display of the third symbol is being executed (during variation) (S1262: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the variation time counter (S1277), and the processing in S1269 is performed. It shifts to and it is determined whether it is within the fluctuation time.

  If the result of determination in S1269 is that it is within the variation time (S1269: Yes), variation display processing is executed (S1270). The variation display process (S1270) is a process of executing variation display (that is, variation effect) of the symbol (third symbol), and detailed processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S1270, the display effect process (S1105) is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the fluctuation time counter is 0, that is, if the fluctuation time has ended (S1269: No) as a result of the determination by the processing of S1269, the setting is made based on the type command received from main controller 110. The stopped symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device (LCD) 81 (S1271).

  Next, the value of the mode stay time counter 273b is added to the value of the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the value of the mode selection counter 273a among the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j (S1272). That is, the mode stay time that has been timed (measured) with respect to the current effect mode is set to the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the current effect mode (any one of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j). ) Is stored and memorized.

  After the processing of S1272, the changing flag 273c is turned off (S1273), the changing mode change flag 273f is turned off (S1274), the changing timekeeping target change flag 273g is turned off (S1275), and the display effect process (S1105) is performed. End and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1263 is that the variation start flag is off (S1263: No), each display process is executed (S1278), the display effect process (S1105) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. In each display process (S1278), a display process such as a customer waiting effect that is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player is executed. Detailed processing of each display processing (S1278) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the above-described variation display process (S1270) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the variable display process (S1270) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 20).

  In the change display process (S1270), first, it is determined whether the changing mode change flag 273f is on (S1301). If the changing mode change flag 273f is off (S1301: No) as a result of the determination in S1301, the effect mode is not changed by operating the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation. Based on the value of the mode selection counter 273a and the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the variation display image of the current rendering mode (ie, the rendering mode indicated by the value of the mode selection counter 273a) is displayed as a variation time counter (FIG. It is set according to the value of (not shown) (S1310).

  In other words, in S1310, the variation display image selected by the effect mode indicated by the value of the mode selection counter 273a and the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the variation display image at the timing indicated by the value of the variation time counter. Set up. As a result, the image controller 274 reads the necessary variation display data from the character ROM 275, forms the variation display image (variation display image in units of frames) set by the processing of S1310, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81. Let

  After the processing of S1310, 1 is added to the mode stay time counter (S1307). Then. Based on the value of the fluctuation time counter, it is determined whether or not high speed fluctuation is occurring (S1308). If high speed fluctuation is occurring (S1308: Yes), the stage mode can be changed by the frame button 22. Therefore, the mode change enable flag 273e is turned on (S1309), and the variation display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1308 is that there is no high-speed fluctuation (S1308: No), the mode change enable flag 273e is turned off (S1311), and the fluctuation display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the changing mode change flag 273f is turned on as a result of the determination in S1301 (S1301: Yes), the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 during the high speed change, so the mode selection counter Based on the value of 273a and the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, according to the value of the variation time counter in the previous production mode (that is, the production mode indicated by the value of mode selection counter 273a before being updated) The changed display image is set so that the background image in the changed display image is changed to the background image corresponding to the current effect mode (that is, the effect mode indicated by the value of the mode selection counter 273a at this time) (S1302). The image controller 274 reads necessary fluctuation display data from the character ROM 275, forms a fluctuation display image (fluctuation display image in units of frames) set by the processing of S1302, and displays it on the third symbol display device 81.

  One frame of the variable display image includes a first image layer (layer) on which a third symbol is drawn, a second image layer on which a background image is drawn, and a third image layer on which a warning character symbol is drawn. In step S1302, the first and third image layers are generated corresponding to the previous effect mode, and the second image layer (image layer on which the background image is drawn) is generated. ) To the one corresponding to the current production mode. Therefore, when the frame button 22 is operated during high-speed fluctuation and the production mode is changed, only the background image is switched to the new production mode, so the production mode can be easily changed even during fluctuation. can do.

  Note that when the effect mode is changed during high-speed fluctuation, the changing mode change flag 273f is kept on until the fluctuation display is completed, so the processing of S1302 is executed and only the background image is changed. The display is changed to that of the (new) production mode and the variable display is continued. After that, since the change mode change flag 273f is turned off with the stop of the change display, the process of S1310 is executed from the next change display, and the change display in the effect mode after the change is the third symbol display. It will be displayed on the device 81.

  After the processing of S1302, it is determined whether or not the variable intermediate timing target change flag 273g is on (S1303). As a result of the determination by the processing of S1303, if the variable timekeeping target change flag 273g is off (S1303: No), the effect mode is changed by operating the frame button 22 during high-speed fluctuation, but the mode stay time Since the target of timing by the counter 273b has not yet been changed to the present (current) presentation mode, in such a case, first, the variable timing target change flag 273g is turned on (S1304).

  Next, based on the value of the mode selection counter 273a, the previous effect mode (that is, the effect mode indicated by the value of the mode selection counter 273a before being updated) out of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j. The value of the mode stay time counter 273b is added to the value of the mode total stay time memory corresponding to (S1305). That is, along with the change of the production mode, the mode stay time measured (measured) with respect to the production mode that has been executed until then is the total mode stay time corresponding to the production mode (that is, the previous production mode). Accumulated and stored in a memory (any one of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j).

  After the process of S1305, the mode stay time counter 273b is cleared (S1306), and the process proceeds to S1307. That is, the measurement (measurement) of the mode stay time for the changed effect mode (that is, the current effect mode) is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, each display process (S1278) described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing each display process (S1278) executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 20).

  In each display process (S1278), first, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 is on (S1321). If the result of determination in S1321 is that the customer waiting effect execution flag is on (S1321: Yes), the customer waiting effect command is received from the main control device 110, so that the customer waiting effect according to the value of the mode selection counter 273a is received. The image is set (S1322), the customer waiting effect execution flag is turned off (S1323), the customer waiting effect flag 273d is turned on (S1324), and each display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the result of determination in S1321 is that the customer waiting effect execution flag is off (S1321: No), as other processing, for example, for error display corresponding to a case where an error command is received from the main control device 110 (S1325) and the display processing ends.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process executed by the MPU 271 in the effect control device 117 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing command reception interrupt processing. This command reception interrupt process is a process for receiving various commands transmitted from the main control device 110, and is executed every time various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 are received. It is.

  In the command reception interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S1401). At this time, when the variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), the process proceeds to S1402.

  On the other hand, when a variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), a variation start flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on (S1404), and a variation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. The variation effect setting process for setting the variation effect data necessary for this is executed (S1405), and the process proceeds to S1402.

  In the process of S1402, it is determined whether a customer waiting effect command has been received (S1402). If the result of determination in S1402 is that a customer waiting effect command has not been received (S1402: No), the process proceeds to S1403.

  On the other hand, when a customer waiting effect command is received (S1402: Yes), a customer waiting effect execution flag (not shown) set in the RAM 273 is turned on (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1403.

  In the process of S1403, it is determined whether another command has been received (S1403). At this time, if no other command is received (S1403: No), this command reception interrupt process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when another command is received (S1403: Yes), processing according to the other command is executed (S1407), and this command reception interrupt processing is terminated. In addition, as a process according to other commands (S1407), for example, when a type command is received, a stop symbol is set, or when an effect time addition / subtraction command is received, the addition / subtraction value of the effect time is set. There is a determination of a corresponding notice effect (for example, a slip effect or a return effect).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first production mode after power-on can be indicated (designated) by the back mode switch 75, so that the production mode that is highly popular among players. For example, it is possible to specify switching so as to be an appropriate production mode according to the customer base of the hall. Therefore, a situation that is inconvenient for the player (for example, a situation where the player has to play in a presentation mode that is not his / her preference) due to the fact that the player cannot perform the switching of the presentation mode by the frame button 22 successfully. It is possible to reduce the possibility, thereby suppressing the player from playing the game with low interest. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained.

  Since the back mode switch 75 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the back mode switch 75 can be prevented from being operated by an unspecified number of people such as players, and the back mode switch 75 Operators can be limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from switching to an inconvenient performance mode contrary to the intention of the hall, and to more suitably suppress the situation where the player must play a game in a performance mode that is not his / her preference. it can. Moreover, the burden on management of the production mode can be reduced.

  Further, since the back mode switch 75 is configured as a mechanical switch, the setting is maintained until the production mode setting (contact connected to the contact 77a of the circuit 77) is next switched. Therefore, once the back mode switch 75 is operated so that the first production mode after power-on becomes a convenient (appropriate) production mode, the state is maintained until the next setting change is required. can do. Therefore, also in this respect, it is possible to reduce the burden on the setting and management of the first effect mode after the power is turned on.

  In addition, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, every time the variable display is executed in each of the first to third effect modes, the variable time is measured (timed) by the mode stay time counter 273b, The measured value is accumulated and stored in a mode total stay time memory (that is, one of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j) corresponding to the effect mode being executed. The variable display period (fluctuation time) executed in each of the first to third effect modes is a value reflecting the length of time that the player actually played the game in the set effect mode. That is, since the values stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j reflect the player's support for each effect mode, the first to third mode total stay time memories The values stored in 273h to 273j can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first production mode after the power is turned on or for future game machine development.

  Note that the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are provided by the power supply by the backup capacitor 281 even when the power supply from the power supply device 115 is disabled (when the power supply is shut off). Since the stored content is retained (backed up), the measurement value of the variation time of the variation display executed in each effect mode can be accumulated over a plurality of days. That is, accumulation over a long period from when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured to when it is discarded is possible. Therefore, the usefulness as information can be improved, and the accuracy of the evaluation can be improved when evaluating each effect mode, such as the player's support for each effect mode.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment described above, by operating the back mode switch 75, the effect mode that is initially set after turning on the power to the pachinko machine 10 is specified. However, in the second embodiment, the pachinko machine is designated. When the power to the machine 10 is turned on, an effect mode that is initially set after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on is designated based on a mode designation command output from the hall computer 500. Note that, in the second embodiment, the same portions as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG.24 and FIG.25 is a block diagram which shows the structure of the game system 1 containing the pachinko machine 10 of 2nd Embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the gaming system 1 includes a pachinko machine 10 and a hall computer 500 connected via an external output terminal board 260.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is not provided with the back mode switch 75 as compared with the configuration of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 6). Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment cannot designate (switch designation) the effect mode that is initially set after the power is turned on, as in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the effect control device 117 is not provided with the backup capacitor 281 and is configured so that the stored contents of the RAM 273 are not backed up. Further, the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j provided in the first embodiment are not provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment is configured not to accumulate and store the time of the variable display executed in each effect mode (first to third effect modes).

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured not to measure the mode stay time on the pachinko machine 10 side, and therefore, the mode stay time counter 273b provided in the first embodiment also includes the variable middle time count. The object change flag 273g is also not provided.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment has an external output terminal plate 260 that is interposed between the main control device 110 or the production control device 117 and the hall computer 500 and connects them to each other. This output terminal board 260 has a plurality of terminals (not shown), and is connected to the main control device 110 or the effect control device 117 and the hall computer 500 through these terminals. Although not shown for the purpose of simplifying the drawing, the output terminal board 260 is also interposed between the payout control device 111 and the hall computer 500 so as to connect the payout control device 111 and the hall computer 500. It is configured.

  The hall computer 500 is an external device for centrally managing information of a plurality of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. In FIGS. 24 and 25, one pachinko machine 10 connected to the hall computer 500 is provided for the purpose of simplifying the drawings.

  The hall computer 500 is a CPU 501 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and various data that are temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. RAM 503 that is a memory for storing data, a hard disk drive (HDD) 504 that is a nonvolatile storage medium, and the other end of a cable (not shown) whose one end is connected to the external output terminal 261 of the pachinko machine 10 And an input / output port 506.

  The CPU 501, ROM 502, and RAM 503 are connected to the input / output port 506 of the hall computer 500 via the bus line 507, and the HDD 504 and interface 505 are connected. Further, the input / output port 506 of the hall computer 500 is installed above each pachinko machine 10 in the hall, and the state of the corresponding pachinko machine 10 (for example, the number of hits on the day, the number of fluctuations after the jackpot (the number of fluctuation starts) ), A current game state, etc.) is connected to a data display 601 for notifying. Further, the input / output port 506 is connected to a display 602 that visually displays various data and a speaker 603 that audibly outputs abnormality notifications.

  The RAM 503 includes a running mode memory 503a, a first mode stay counter 503b, a second mode stay counter 503c, and a third mode stay counter 503d. The in-execution mode memory 503 a and the first to third mode stay counters 503 b to 503 d are provided for each pachinko machine 10 connected to the hall computer 500. That is, these four configurations 503a to 503d are provided as one set in the RAM 503 in association with the table number data for identifying the pachinko machine 10 installed in the hall.

  The in-execution mode memory 503a is a memory for storing the effect modes (first to third effect modes) being executed in the pachinko machine 10. When the in-execution mode memory 503a receives the in-execution mode data from the pachinko machine 10, a value corresponding to the effect mode indicated by the received in-execution mode data is stored. In the present embodiment, “0” is stored in the running mode memory 503a if the received running mode data is a value indicating that the first performance mode is being executed in the pachinko machine 10. Similarly, if the received in-execution mode data is a value indicating that the second effect mode and the third effect mode are being executed in the pachinko machine 10, “1” and “2” are respectively in the in-execution mode memory. It is stored in 503a.

  The first mode stay time counter 503b is a counter that measures the time during which the variable display is performed in the first effect mode in the pachinko machine 10, and the second mode stay time counter 503c is in the second effect mode in the pachinko machine 10. The third mode stay time counter 503d is a counter that measures the time during which the variable display is performed in the third effect mode in the pachinko machine 10.

  The first to third mode residence time counters 503b to 503d are initialized (cleared to 0) when the hall computer 500 is turned on, and each time a changing signal indicating "1" (that is, in an on state) is received. The mode stay time counter (any of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) corresponding to the value stored in the running mode memory 503a (ie, the rendering mode being executed by the pachinko machine 10). Is added one by one. When the changing signal indicating “0” (that is, in the off state) is received, the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d are cleared (cleared to 0).

  The HDD 504 includes a first mode total stay time memory 504a, a second mode total stay time memory 504b, and a third mode total stay time memory 504c. The first mode total stay time memory 504a, the second mode total stay time memory 504b, and the third mode total stay time memory 504c are respectively variable displays (that is, mode stay times) executed in each effect mode in the pachinko machine 10. ) For storing and storing the time.

  Each time the changing flag 503b is switched from on to off, the values of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d are added to the mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c, respectively. The stay time is stored in a nonvolatile manner (that is, accumulated).

  Note that only one set of first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c is provided regardless of the number of pachinko machines 10 installed in the hall. In other words, the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c store the mode stay times in all the pachinko machines 10 under management in the hall computer 500. Therefore, the values stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c reflect the player's support for each effect mode in the hall where the hall computer 500 is installed.

  Although details will be described later, when the hall computer 500 of the present embodiment receives the mode designation command output request output when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to output to the pachinko machine 10 a mode designation command for designating the rendering mode having the longest mode stay time. The production mode indicated (designated) indicated by the mode designation command received from is set. Therefore, according to the gaming system 1 of the present embodiment, all pachinko machines 10 in the hall have an effect mode that can be said to be the highest support level of the player in the hall as the first effect mode after the power is turned on. Is set.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process executed by the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In the timer interrupt process of the second embodiment, similarly to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 13) of the first embodiment described above, after starting every 2 ms and performing the processes of S501 to S505, the hall computer A hall computer output information setting process for setting game data to be output to 500 is executed (S506). Then, after executing the hall computer output information setting process (S506), the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a specific process executed in the hall computer output information setting process (S506) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the hall computer output information setting process (S506) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

  In the hall computer output information setting process (S506), first, an external output buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is cleared (S1501), and a changing flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is turned on. (S1502). This changing flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is displaying fluctuations. If the changing flag is on (ie, “1”), the pachinko machine 10 is displaying fluctuations. Indicates that

  As a result of checking in the process of S1502, if the changing flag is on (S1502: Yes), 1 is set to the bit corresponding to the changing signal among the bits constituting the game data (S1503), and the process of S1504 Migrate to

  On the other hand, if the changing flag is OFF as a result of checking in the processing of S1502 (S1502: No), 0 is set to the bit corresponding to the changing signal among the bits constituting the game data (S1506), and S1504. Move on to processing.

  In S1504, as other setting processing, a value is set to a bit corresponding to each signal other than the changing signal in the game data (S1504). For example, the bit corresponding to the jackpot / medium signal in the game data is set to 1 if the jackpot is being hit, and is set to 0 otherwise. For example, the bit corresponding to the change start signal in the game data is set to 1 when change display is started, and is set to 0 otherwise.

  After the processing of S1504, game data in which the state of each signal (that is, the value of each bit) is set is set in the external output buffer (S1505), and the hall computer output information setting processing (S506) is terminated. When the game data is set in the external output buffer in S1505, the game data to which the pachinko machine 10 from which the game data is output is added so that the hall computer 500 can identify the pachinko machine 10 from which the game data is output. To the external output buffer.

  When the game data is set in the external output buffer by the process of S1505, the game data is stored in the hall computer 500 via the external terminal board 260 by the external output process of S201 executed next time in the main process (see FIG. 9). Is output.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the variation process of the second embodiment. In the variation process (S214) of the second embodiment, unlike the variation process (see FIG. 10) of the first embodiment described above, a variation start flag (FIG. (Not shown) is turned on (S317), and the variation process is terminated. Further, when the variable display is ended, that is, in the case of S307: Yes, the stop display setting (S309) and the stop command setting (S310) are executed, and then a variable flag (not shown) is set. After turning off (S318), the variation process is terminated.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 29, in the start-up process of the effect control device 117 in the second embodiment, the same process as the start-up process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16) is performed until the interrupt permission setting (S1013). Is called. Then, after the process of S1013, the mode selection counter setting process for setting the initial value of the mode selection counter 273a is executed (S1018), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 31).

  Next, the above-described mode selection counter setting process (S1018) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a mode selection counter setting process (S1018) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) of the second embodiment.

  In the mode selection counter setting process (S1018), first, a mode designation command output request is output to the hall computer 500 (S1601). Note that the mode designation command output request output by the processing of S1601 includes information indicating the machine number of the pachinko machine 10. When the hall computer 500 receives the mode designation command output request output by the processing of S1601, the hall computer 500 sets the request to the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source of the request (that is, the pachinko machine 10 specified by the information indicating the machine number). A mode designation command for designating an effect mode is output.

  Therefore, after the processing of S1601, it is confirmed whether or not a mode designation command is received from the hall computer 500 (S1602). At this time, if the mode designation command has not been received (S1602: No), the process returns to S1602, and the receipt of the mode designation command is confirmed again. When it is confirmed that the mode designation command has been received (S1602: Yes), a value corresponding to the rendering mode indicated by the mode designation command is set in the mode setting counter 273a based on the mode designation command (S1603). The mode selection counter setting process (S1107) ends.

  Although details will be described later, the hall computer 500 stores the mode designation command output request from the pachinko machine 10 in a nonvolatile manner in the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the HDD 504. The mode designation command indicating (designating) the production mode having the longest mode total stay time (total time during which the variable display is executed) is set among the first to third production modes. It is returned to the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source of the command output request. Since the mode total stay time is a value that reflects the player's support level for each production mode, the mode selection counter setting process (S1018) causes the pachinko machine 10 in the hall to be the most supported in that hall. The production mode is set as the production mode that is executed first after the power is turned on.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 31, in the main process of the production control device 117 in the second embodiment, the running mode data set in the external output buffer in the RAM 273 is transmitted to the hall computer 600 through the external output terminal board 260. The (output) external output process (S1111) is executed as the first process repeatedly executed, that is, prior to the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101).

  Next, the rendering mode change process (S1101) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect mode change process (S1101) executed in the main process (see FIG. 31) of the second embodiment.

  In the effect mode change confirmation process (S1101) of the second embodiment, unlike the effect mode change process process (see FIG. 18) of the first embodiment described above, after the changing mode change flag 273f is turned on in S1204, the process of S1206 is performed. Processing (updating the value of the mode selection counter 273) is executed. Then, after the process of S1206, the execution mode data corresponding to the value of the execution mode data corresponding to the value of the mode selection counter 273a is set (S1208).

  The in-execution mode data is configured as 1-byte data consisting of the 0th bit to the 7th bit, and the presentation mode (that is, mode selection) being executed according to the set value of the lower 3 bits (0th bit to 2nd bit) The value of the counter 273a). More specifically, the running mode data in which the 0th bit is “1” and the remaining bits (that is, the 1st to 7th bits) are “0”, It shows that it is 1 production mode. The running mode data in which the first bit is “1” and the remaining bits (that is, the 0th, 2nd to 7th bits) are “0”, the performance mode being executed is the first. It shows that it is 2 production mode. The running mode data in which the second bit is “1” and the remaining bits (ie, the 0th, 1st, 3rd to 7th bits) are “0”, It shows that it is 3 production modes.

  Therefore, in the processing of S1208, if the value of the mode selection counter 273a is “0”, “00000001” is set as the running mode data, and if the value of the mode selection counter 273a is “1”, “00000010”. Is set as the running mode data, and if the value of the mode selection counter 273a is “2”, “00000100” is set as the running mode data.

  After the processing in S1208, the set in-execution mode data is set in an external output buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 273 (S1209), and the effect mode change confirmation processing (S1101) is terminated. In S1209, when the running mode data is set in the external output buffer, the machine number data of the pachinko machine 10 is added so that the hall computer 500 can identify the pachinko machine 10 from which the running mode data is output. Set the currently executed mode data in the external output buffer.

  When the in-execution mode data is set in the external output buffer by the process of S1209, the in-execution mode data is output to the hall computer 500 via the external terminal board 260 by the external output process of S1111 executed next time. The

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is configured not to measure the mode stay time on the pachinko machine 10 side. Therefore, although not shown, the display effect process (S1106) executed in the main process (see FIG. 31) of the second embodiment is executed in the display effect process (see FIG. 20) of the first embodiment. Of these processes, the processes of S1268, S1272, and S1275 are omitted.

  That is, in the display effect process (S1106) of the second embodiment, after the initial value is set in the variation time counter (not shown) in S1267, the process proceeds to S1269. Moreover, in the display effect process of 2nd Embodiment, when a variable display is complete | finished, ie, in the case of S1269: Yes, a stop symbol is displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus (LCD) 81 (S1271), and it is changing. The flag 273c is turned off (S1273), the changing mode change flag 273f is turned off (S1274), and the display effect process (S1105) is ended.

  Similarly, although not shown, the variation display process (S1270) of the second embodiment is the process of S1303 to S1307 among the processes executed in the variation display process (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment. The processing is omitted. That is, in the fluctuation display process (S1270) of the second embodiment, after the process of S1302 or S1310, the process of S1308 for confirming whether or not high-speed fluctuation is occurring is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, data reception processing executed by the hall computer 500 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing data reception processing. This data reception process is a timer interrupt process executed every predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms).

  In the data reception process, first, it is confirmed whether there is reception data, that is, whether reception data is stored in a reception buffer (not shown) provided in the RAM 503 (S2001). If there is no reception data as a result of the confirmation in the process of S2001 (S2001: No), the data reception process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if there is reception data as a result of the confirmation in S2001 (S2001: Yes), it is confirmed whether the reception data is a specified command output request (S2002). At this time, if the received data is not a specified command output request (S2002: No), the process proceeds to S2006.

  As a result of checking in the process of S2002, if the received data is a specified command output request (S2002: Yes), the values in the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are compared (S2003).

  After the process of S2003, an effect mode corresponding to the mode total stay time memory having the largest value among the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c, that is, an effect mode having the longest mode total stay time is selected. (S2004), a mode designation command for designating the selected effect mode is set (S2005). Next, the set mode designation command is output to the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source of the designation command output request (S2006), and the process proceeds to S2007.

  When the mode designation command is output by the process of S2006, the mode designation command is input to the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 via the external terminal board 260. The effect control device 117 sets the value indicated by the received mode designation command in the mode setting counter 273a. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 outputs a designated command output request to the hall computer 500 when the power is turned on. As a result of the process of S2006, the pachinko machine 10 includes the first to third effect modes. The effect mode with the longest mode total stay time, that is, the effect mode most supported in the hall, is set as the effect mode that is executed first after the power is turned on.

  In S2007, it is confirmed whether the received data is in-execution mode data (S2007). As a result of checking in the process of S2007, if the received data is not the running mode data (S2007: No), the process proceeds to S2009.

  On the other hand, if the received data is the running mode data as a result of checking in the process of S2007 (S2007: Yes), the value corresponding to the rendering mode indicated by the received running mode data corresponds to the received running mode data. The in-execution mode memory 503a corresponding to the attached machine number data is stored (S2008), and the process proceeds to S2009.

  In S2008, if the received running mode data is a value indicating the first effect mode, “0” is stored in the executing mode memory 503a, and the received executing mode data is a value indicating the second effect mode. If it is, “1” is stored in the running mode memory 503a, and if the received running mode data is a value indicating the third effect mode, “2” is stored in the running mode memory 503a.

  In S2009, it is confirmed whether or not the received data is game data (S2009). If the received data is not game data as a result of checking in the process of S2009 (S2009: No), the process proceeds to S2011.

  On the other hand, if the received data is game data as a result of checking in the process of S2009 (S2009: Yes), a changing signal check process for checking the state of the changing signal included in the received game data is executed. (S2010), the process proceeds to S2011. Details of the changing signal confirmation process (S2010) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S2011, as other reception processing, when game data is received, processing according to the state of a signal other than the changing signal (for example, jackpot signal), game data, running mode data, or In response to a signal that is not a specified command output request (for example, a door opening signal output from the main control device 110 when the front frame 14 or the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened), data is accumulated and the display 602 is displayed. The process of performing the display of the data and the notification by the data display 601 and the speaker 603 is executed (S2011). After the process of S2011, the data reception process is terminated.

  Next, the changing signal confirmation process (S2010) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the changing signal confirmation process (S2010) executed in the data reception process (see FIG. 33).

  In the changing signal confirmation process, first, it is checked whether or not the value of the bit corresponding to the changing signal in the received game data is 1, that is, whether or not the changing signal is on (S2021). At this time, if the value of the bit corresponding to the changing signal in the game data is 1 (S2021: Yes), it corresponds to the value of the running mode memory 503a among the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d. 1 is added to the mode staying time counter (S2022). In S2022, a mode stay time counter corresponding to the machine number data associated with the received game data is added.

  If the changing signal is in the ON state (that is, “1”), the pachinko machine 10 is executing the changing display. Therefore, by the process of S2022, by adding 1 to the mode stay time counter corresponding to the value of the running mode memory 503a, the variable display is executed in the effect mode being executed (set) in the pachinko machine 10. The first to third mode residence time counters 503b to 503d can be timed.

  After the process of S2022, it is confirmed whether or not the changing signal state flag (not shown) provided in the RAM 503 is ON (S2023). The changing signal state flag (not shown) is a flag indicating whether or not the changing signal state was previously turned on. If the changing signal state flag is turned on (that is, “1”), the changing signal state is changed. Indicates that the previous state was on, and if it is off (that is, “0”), it indicates that the state of the changing signal was previously off.

  If the changing signal state flag is OFF (S2023: No) as a result of checking in the processing of S2023, it indicates that the changing signal has switched from the OFF state to the ON state. In this case, the changing signal state The flag is turned on (S2024), and the changing signal confirmation process (S2010) ends.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal state flag is on (S2023: Yes) as a result of checking in the processing of S2023, it indicates that the changing signal in the on state has been continuously received. In this case, the processing of S2024 is performed. Skip and end the changing signal confirmation processing.

  Further, as a result of checking in the processing of S2021, if the value of the bit corresponding to the changing signal in the game data is 0, that is, the changing signal is OFF (S2021: No), the changing signal state flag is ON. It is confirmed whether or not there is (S2025).

  As a result of checking in the processing of S2025, if the changing signal state flag is on (S2025: Yes), it indicates that the changing signal has been switched from the on state to the off state. The flag is turned off (S2026).

  After the processing of S2026, the values of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d corresponding to the machine number data associated with the game data are respectively set to the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c. (S2027), and the process proceeds to S2028.

  That is, in S2027, the value of the first mode stay time counter 503b is added to the first mode total stay time memory 504a, and the value of the second mode stay time counter 503c is added to the second mode total stay time memory 504b. The value of the third mode stay time counter 503d is added to the third mode total stay time memory 504c.

  On the other hand, if the changing signal state flag is OFF (S2025: No) as a result of checking in the processing of S2025, it indicates that the changing signal that is in the OFF state has been continuously received. In such a case, in S2026 and S2027, The process is skipped and the process proceeds to S2028.

  In S2028, the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d corresponding to the machine number data associated with the received game data are cleared (cleared to 0), and the changing signal confirmation process (S2010) is ended. .

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the effect mode having the longest mode stay time among the first to third effect modes is set as the first effect mode after power-on. Therefore, it can suppress having a player play a game with low interest. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained. In addition, since the setting of the first production mode after the power is turned on is performed by the output of the mode designation command output request and the reception of the mode selection command automatically performed after the power is turned on, the first production mode after the power is turned on The burden on the setting can be reduced.

  Further, since the mode total stay time is stored (accumulated) on the hall computer 500 side (first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504b), the backup capacitor 281 as in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. (Refer to FIG. 6) is not necessary, which is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10. When the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment has the backup capacitor 281 as in the first embodiment, the mode total stay time is accumulated in both the pachinko machine 10 and the hall computer 500. be able to. In such a case, the mode total stay time can be prevented from being completely lost by storing a plurality of mode total stay times.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment described above, by operating the back mode switch 75, the effect mode that is initially set after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10 is specified. However, in the third embodiment, the pachinko machine is designated. As the power is turned on, the mode total stay time memory having the largest accumulated value (that is, the longest mode stay time) among the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j is stored. The corresponding effect mode is set as the effect mode that is executed first after the power is turned on.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment is configured in the same manner as the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 6) except that the back mode switch 75 is not provided. That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment cannot specify the effect mode that is initially set after the power is turned on on the pachinko machine 10 side as in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing start-up processing executed by the effect control device 117 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 35, in the start-up process of the production control device 117 in the third embodiment, the same process as the start-up process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16) is performed until the interrupt permission setting (S1013). Is called.

  Then, after the processing of S1013, the values of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are compared (S1019), and the value is the largest among the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j. A value corresponding to the effect mode corresponding to the mode total stay time memory, that is, the effect mode having the longest mode total stay time is selected (S1020). Thereafter, the value selected by the process of S1020 is set in the mode selection counter 273a (S1021), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the effect mode with the longest mode total stay time among the first to third effect modes is set as the first effect mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, it can suppress having a player play a game with low interest. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained. Since the setting of the first effect mode after power-on is automatically performed based on the contents of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j, the setting of the first effect mode after power-on is performed. The burden can be reduced.

  Further, since the mode total stay time is a value reflecting the player's support for each effect mode, the effect mode having the longest mode total stay time is the effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, since the first production mode after power-on can be the production mode most supported by the player, the player must play in a production mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation can be reduced more suitably.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be easily guessed.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the sound output and the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 are controlled by one control device (that is, the effect control device 117). Alternatively, the lighting control of various lamps and the control of the third symbol display device 81 may be performed by separate control devices.

  For example, a control device (sound lamp control device) for controlling sound output and lighting of various lamps is connected to the main control device 110, and the control device (display control device) controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by sound lamp control. It is also possible to connect to a device so that each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device, and a display instruction is given from the sound lamp control device to the display control device. Alternatively, a control device (display control device) that is controlled by the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the main control device 110, and a control device (sound lamp control device) that controls sound output and lighting of various lamps is displayed control device. In this case, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device, and the display control device may be configured to instruct the sound lamp control device to control sound output or lighting of various lamps. . The command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device.

  In the first embodiment, the effect mode change confirmation process (see FIG. 18) for updating the mode selection counter 273a when the frame button 22 is operated at a predetermined time is performed in the main process (see FIG. 18). 17), the presentation mode change confirmation process (see FIG. 18) may be executed in a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically (for example, every 2 ms). .

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is connected to the effect control device 117. However, the back mode switch 75 is connected to the main control device 110, and the setting is read by the main control device 110. It is good also as a structure which outputs a setting command to the production | presentation control apparatus 117 according to the read setting.

  In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is connected to the effect control device 117. However, the frame button 22 is connected to the main control device 110, and the setting is read by the main control device 110. A command corresponding to the setting is output to the effect control device 117, the mode selection counter 273a is set by the setting command, and the mode stay time is measured using the mode stay time counter 273b as in the first embodiment. (Timekeeping) The measured mode stay time may be stored in a mode total stay time memory (first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j) corresponding to the value of the mode selection counter 273a.

  Further, when the frame button 22 is connected to the main control device 110 and the setting is read by the main control device 110, the mode stay time can be measured by the main control device 110. That is, the main controller 110 is provided with a configuration for setting (storing) the current presentation mode such as a counter and a flag similar to the mode selection counter 273a, and the time when the change is executed in the set presentation mode (that is, the mode) (Stay time) may be measured by a counter similar to the mode stay time counter 273b. In such a case, a memory similar to the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j is provided in the RAM 203, and the mode stay time measured in the memory corresponding to the effect mode at that time is added and stored. It is good. Since the RAM 203 is configured to be backed up by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115, the measured mode stay time is accumulated and stored without providing the backup capacitor 281 as in the first embodiment. can do. A backup capacitor 281 may be provided to supply a backup voltage to the RAM 203.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the frame button 22 is connected to the main control device 110, the main control means 110 measures the mode stay time, and the measured mode stay time and the time A command indicating the set production mode may be output to the hall computer 500 via the external terminal board 260 and stored in the first to third mode total residence time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500. . Alternatively, in such a case, the RAM 203 of the main control means 110 accumulates and stores the mode stay time of each effect mode, and the accumulated mode stay time (that is, the total mode stay time) is stored via the external terminal board 260. It is good also as a structure which outputs to the hall computer 500, and makes it accumulate | store in the 1st-3rd mode total residence time memory 504a-504c of the hall computer 500. FIG.

  In the first embodiment, the mode stay time is measured by the mode stay time counter 273b of the effect control device 117, and the mode total stay time of each effect mode is stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 272j. Although it is configured to store and store, a value obtained by measuring the mode stay time by the mode stay time counter 273b of the effect control device 117 is output to the main control device 110, and the mode stay time is configured to be backed up. The data may be stored and stored in the RAM 203. Alternatively, the mode total stay time of each effect mode is stored and stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 272j to the main controller 110, and the mode total stay time is backed up. You may accumulate and memorize | store in RAM203 comprised so that it is possible.

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is provided and the effect mode that is initially set after the power is turned on can be set by the back mode switch 75. However, the back mode switch 75 is not provided, You may make it give the pachinko machine 10 of 1 embodiment only the function which memorize | stores the mode total stay time of each production mode.

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is provided, and the setting of the back mode switch 75 when the power is turned on is set as the effect mode set first after the power is turned on. You may comprise so that the setting of the back surface mode switch 75 changed later may be made into the production | presentation mode set initially after power-on. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the frame button 22, the process of S1015 is executed, and the mode total stay time of each effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1015, Before the process of S1016 is executed, a wait time during which the setting of the back mode switch 75 can be changed may be provided. Thereby, after confirming the mode total stay time of each production mode, the suitable production mode can be set.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment is connected to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, and each pachinko machine 10 halls the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j when the power is turned on. It outputs to the computer 500, and the hall computer 500 discriminates the production mode having the longest total stay time in each pachinko machine 10, and, based on the discrimination result, the most in the hall among the first to third production modes. The pachinko machine 10 is configured to discriminate the production mode in which the total stay time is the longest, and the discriminating “the production having the longest total stay time in the most pachinko machines 10 in the hall” is determined. “Mode” is notified from the data display 601 or the speaker 603 installed above each pachinko machine 10. Good. In such a case, after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting of the back mode switch 75 is changed after the notification that “the production mode in which the total stay time is the longest in the most pachinko machines 10 in the hall” is notified. By providing a wait time that can be set, it is possible to set the production mode that is most supported in the hall.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, when the hall computer 500 receives the mode designation | designated command output request from the pachinko machine 10, based on the memory content of the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 504a-504c, By selecting a production mode with the longest total stay time and outputting a mode designation command for designating the selected production mode to the pachinko machine 10, the production mode that is set for the pachinko machine 10 first after power-on is selected. Although it was set as the structure to set, the storage contents of the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are output to the pachinko machine 10, and in the pachinko machine 10, an effect mode with the longest mode total stay time is selected, You may comprise so that the selected production mode may be set to the pachinko machine 10 at the beginning after power-on.

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is provided, and the effect mode that is initially set after the power is turned on is configured to be set by the back mode switch 75, but the effect that is set first after the power is turned on. The mode may be configured to be set without depending on the back mode switch 75. For example, when a switch is separately provided and this switch is set so that the setting of the back mode switch 75 is not read when the power is turned on, the setting of the back mode switch 75 is ignored and the setting is determined in advance. You may comprise. Alternatively, the knob 75a of the back mode switch 75 can be positioned not only at “1” to “3” as in the first embodiment but also at “0”, and the knob 75a is set at the position “0”. In such a case, a predetermined setting may be used.

  Further, in the second embodiment, without providing the back mode switch 75, based on the mode designation command output from the hall computer 500, the effect mode that is initially set after power-on is set. You may provide the back surface mode switch 75 in the pachinko machine 10 of 2nd Embodiment. In such a case, for example, the effect mode specified by the back mode switch 75 may be set as the effect mode set first after the power is turned on. Alternatively, a separate switch is provided, and according to the setting of this switch, the presentation mode designated by the back mode switch 75 is preferentially set to the presentation mode that is set first after the power is turned on, or output from the hall computer 500 It may be switched whether the setting is preferentially performed first after power-on based on the mode designation command. Alternatively, the knob 75a of the back mode switch 75 can be positioned not only at “1” to “3” as in the first embodiment but also at “0”, and the knob 75a is positioned at “0”. In the case where it is determined, based on the mode designation command output from the hall computer 500, an effect mode that is initially set after power-on may be set.

  Further, in the third embodiment, without providing the back mode switch 75, the effect mode having the longest mode total stay time is selected after the power is turned on based on the values of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j. However, the back mode switch 75 may be provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In such a case, for example, a switch is provided separately from the back mode switch 75, and an effect mode designated by the back mode switch 75 is preferentially set first after power-on according to the setting of this switch. It may be switched between the mode and the effect mode having the longest mode stay time as the effect mode set first after the power is turned on. Alternatively, the knob 75a of the back mode switch 75 can be positioned not only at “1” to “3” as in the first embodiment but also at “0”, and the knob 75a is positioned at “0”. If it is, the effect mode with the longest mode stay time may be set as the effect mode set first after the power is turned on.

  In the second embodiment, the mode designation command is output from the hall computer 500 by outputting a mode designation command output request to the hall computer 500 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. The hall computer 500 may output a mode designation command to the pachinko machine 10 at a predetermined time (for example, a predetermined time before opening the hall), without outputting a mode specification command output request to 500.

  Alternatively, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a mode designation command output request is output to the hall computer 500 when a predetermined operation is input without automatically outputting a mode designation command output request to the hall computer 500. The mode designation command may be received from the hall computer 500.

  In the second embodiment, the mode designation command is received from the hall computer 500 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. However, a backup voltage is supplied to the RAM 273 to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. A backup capacitor 281 is provided, and the hall computer 500 outputs a mode designation command to the pachinko machine 10 at a predetermined time (for example, noon every day), stores it in the RAM 273, and stores it at the next power-on. It is good also as a structure which sets presentation mode based on the made value.

  In each of the above embodiments, every time the power is turned on, the effect mode that is set first after the power is turned on is set based on the setting of the back mode switch 75 or the mode designation command received from the hall computer 500. However, only for the first power-on of the day, the back mode switch 75 is set or the production mode is set according to the mode designation command received from the hall computer 500. May be.

  For example, a timer that can measure the date and time such as RTC is provided, and the setting of the back mode switch 75 is set only when the power is turned on before a predetermined time (for example, a certain time before opening the hall), or The production mode is set according to the mode designation command received from the hall computer 500. Alternatively, only when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the setting of the back mode switch 75 or the setting of the effect mode according to the mode designation command received from the hall computer 500 is performed.

  Alternatively, in the process of S1012 in the start-up process of the production control device 117, the contents of the power-off flag and the power-off process flag provided in the RAM 273 are not initialized, and the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are Is also off, that is, only when it indicates that the power has been completely cut off, setting of the back mode switch 75 or setting of the effect mode according to the mode designation command received from the hall computer 500 is performed. You may comprise as follows. In such a case, the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are initialized after the setting of the effect mode setting.

  In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on while operating the frame button 22 (that is, in the case of S1014: Yes), the mode total stay time of each effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, the mode total stay time of each effect mode is not displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and is set to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment first after the power is turned on by the back mode switch 75. It may be configured to have only a function capable of specifying a production mode. In such a case, if the effect control device 117 is collected, the mode total stay time of each effect mode can be obtained.

  In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on while operating the frame button 22 (that is, in the case of S1014: Yes), the mode total stay time of each effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, not only when the power is turned on, but also when the power is on, a predetermined operation (for example, long pressing of the frame button 22 or operation of a dedicated button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10) Etc.), the mode total stay time of each effect mode may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a command is received from the main control device 110 at a predetermined timing (for example, a predetermined time after the hall is closed in advance), the total time spent in each effect mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is good also as a structure.

  In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on while operating the frame button 22 (that is, in the case of S1014: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 uses the mode total stay time of each effect mode as a numerical value. However, instead of numerical values, graphs (bar graphs, pie charts, etc.) may be used for display. Alternatively, the order of each effect mode is determined according to the mode total stay time value, and the order is displayed, or the mode total stay time value is grouped (for example, the mode total stay time is long and short. Grouping), and which group each effect mode belongs to may be displayed in a distinguishable manner.

  In the first embodiment, when the power is turned on while operating the frame button 22 (that is, in the case of S1014: Yes), the third symbol display device 81 uses the mode total stay time of each effect mode as a numerical value. However, not all the production modes are displayed, and only some production modes may be displayed. For example, display only the production mode with the longest mode total stay time, display the one with the longest mode total stay time and the second longest mode stay, or group the production mode when the mode total stay time is long It is good also as a structure which displays only about.

  In addition, when a predetermined input (for example, an input from a switch or an instruction input by an input device such as a keyboard) is input to the hall computer 500 of the second embodiment, the first to third mode total residence time memory Based on the contents stored in 504a to 504c, the mode total stay time of each effect mode accumulated from all the pachinko machines 10 under management may be displayed on the display 602. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a display in the data display 601 and displays the mode total stay time of each production mode on the display. Alternatively, the mode total stay time information of each effect mode may be output to the pachinko machine 10 and the mode total stay time of each effect mode may be output to the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Alternatively, a printing device such as a printer may be connected to the hall computer 500, and the total mode time information in the rendering mode may be output from the printing device.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the RAM 273 is configured to be able to retain (backup) the stored contents even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off by the backup power supplied from the backup capacitor 281, but the backup capacitor 281 is not provided. The RAM 273 may not be backed up. In such a case, the mode total stay time while the power is turned on can be obtained (that is, the mode total stay time across the days cannot be obtained). Therefore, the mode total stay time during the business hours of the day can be obtained, for example, by displaying the mode total stay time before the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. By doing so, it is possible to obtain a long-term mode total stay time.

  In the first embodiment, the RAM 273 is configured to retain (backup) the stored contents even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off by the backup power supplied from the backup capacitor 281, but the backup capacitor 281 receives power from the backup capacitor 281. Power is supplied from the first RAM and the backup capacitor 281 that are not supplied (that is, the stored contents cannot be retained when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off) and the stored contents are stored even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. 2nd RAM) may be provided, and the first to third mode total residence time memories 273h to 273j may be provided in the second RAM. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides the memory corresponded to 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 273h-273j in non-volatile storage media, such as EEPROM and flash memory.

  In the first embodiment, the backup capacitor 281 is provided in the effect control device 117. However, the backup capacitor 281 may be provided outside the effect control device 117. In such a case, the backup capacitor 281 may be provided inside the board box 101 that houses the effect control device 117, or the backup capacitor 281 may be provided outside the board box 101. Alternatively, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the RAM 273.

  In the first embodiment, the mode total stay time (that is, the time during which the mode stay time is accumulated) is accumulated and stored in the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. However, the RAM 273 stores the first to third modes. Instead of the total residence time memories 273h to 273j, a configuration may be adopted in which they are stored in a removable external storage medium (flash memory).

  Alternatively, a mode stay time counter similar to the mode stay time counter 273b is provided for each effect mode, and measurement by each mode stay time counter is continuously performed (that is, accumulated to some extent), and a removable external storage medium as appropriate A configuration may be adopted in which data is stored in (flash memory). In such a case, the value of each mode stay time counter is cleared each time the value of each mode stay time counter is output to and stored in an external storage medium (flash memory).

  In the second embodiment, the total mode stay time of each production mode accumulated from all the pachinko machines 10 under management (that is, the time spent accumulating the mode stay time of each pachinko machine 10) is stored in the hall computer 500. Although it was set as the structure memorize | stored in the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 504a-504c provided in HDD504, it is the external storage which can be removed without providing the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 504a-504c. It is good also as a structure memorize | stored in a medium (flash memory).

  Alternatively, without providing the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c, the mode stay time is continuously performed (that is, accumulated to some extent) in the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d. A configuration may be adopted in which the data is stored and stored in a removable external storage medium (flash memory) as appropriate. In such a case, every time the values of the first to third mode residence time counters 503b to 503d are output and stored in the external storage medium (flash memory), the first to third mode residence time counters 503b to 503d Clear the value.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which measures the fluctuation | variation time in the set production | presentation mode with the mode stay time counter 273b, and accumulate | stores in the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memories 273h-273j, The time to be measured as time (the time accumulated as the mode total stay time) may include not only the variation time in the set effect mode but also the time for jackpot. Or it is good also as a structure which measures the jackpot time which occurred in the set production | presentation mode as mode stay time, and obtains mode total stay time by the accumulation | storage.

  Alternatively, the entire period from when one effect mode is set in the mode selection counter 273a to when the value of the mode selection counter 273a is changed next (that is, when the effect mode is switched) may be set as the mode stay time. Moreover, while measuring the time during the customer waiting effect in each effect mode, the entire period until the effect mode was switched to the next effect mode was measured, and the time during the customer waiting effect was subtracted from the entire period. A value may be used as the mode stay time, and the mode total stay time may be obtained by accumulation thereof.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, whenever switching of a production | presentation mode or a variable display is complete | finished, the value of the mode stay time counter 273b is set to the mode total residence time memory (1st-3rd corresponding to the production mode to be measured. Mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j), and each time the mode stay time counter 273b is cleared, the mode stay time counter is provided for each effect mode to continuously measure ( That is, it accumulates to some extent), and at a predetermined time (periodically or when a predetermined operation is performed), the mode stay time counter value of each effect mode is set to the mode total stay in which backup power is supplied from the backup capacitor 281. The time memory (first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j) may be accumulated and stored.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which accumulates and memorize | stores a value in the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 273h-273j at any time, without providing the mode stay time counter 273b.

  In the second embodiment, the variation time in the set production mode is measured by the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d and stored in the first to third total stay time memories 504a to 504c. However, the time measured as the mode stay time (the time accumulated as the mode total stay time) may include not only the variation time in the set production mode but also the time during jackpot. Or it is good also as a structure which measures the jackpot time which occurred in the set production | presentation mode as mode stay time, and obtains mode total stay time by the accumulation | storage. The hall computer 500 can determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit based on the jackpot / medium signal received from the pachinko machine 10.

  Alternatively, in the hall computer 500, all the processes from the time when one presentation mode is set in the mode selection counter 273a in the pachinko machine 10 until the value of the mode selection counter 273a is changed next (that is, the presentation mode is switched). The period may be measured as the mode stay time. That is, the entire period from when a value is set in the running mode memory 503a until the setting is changed may be measured as the mode stay time. Also, a command indicating that a customer waiting effect is in progress is received from the pachinko machine 10, and the time during the customer waiting effect in each effect mode is measured based on the command, while the effect mode is changed to the next effect mode. The total period until switching can be measured, and the value obtained by subtracting the time during the customer waiting effect from the total period can be used as the mode stay time, and the mode total stay time can be obtained by the accumulation.

  Further, in the second embodiment, every time the changing signal received by the hall computer 500 is in the ON state indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is changing, the mode stay corresponding to the value of the running mode memory 503a is maintained. The time counter (one of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) is incremented by one. The measurement of the mode stay time by the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d is not limited to this.

  For example, when the hall computer 500 receives a fluctuation start command indicating that the fluctuation display has been started in the pachinko machine 10, a predetermined flag provided in the RAM 503 is set to ON and is executed in the pachinko machine 10. When the command indicating that the changed display has been completed is received, the flag is turned off, and while the flag is on, the mode stay time counter (the first counter corresponding to the value of the running mode memory) 1 may be added to the value of any one of the first to third mode dwell time counters 503b to 503d.

  Alternatively, the running mode data received by the hall computer 500 from the pachinko machine 10 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 without providing the running mode memory 503a, and the changing signal received by the hall computer 500 is stored in the pachinko machine. Each time 10 is in an ON state indicating that it is fluctuating, an AND operation is performed between the running mode data stored in the RAM 503 and “11111111”, and a mode stay time counter (1 corresponding to a bit of 1) The value of any of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) may be incremented by one. That is, the in-execution mode data used in the second embodiment is “00000001” in the case of the first effect mode, “00000010” in the case of the second effect mode, and the third effect mode. If the value of the first bit is 1 as a result of the AND operation, 1 is added to the first mode stay time counter 503b, and if the value of the second bit is 1, the first bit is 1. 1 is added to the 2-mode stay time counter 503c, and if the value of the third bit is 1, 1 is added to the third mode stay time counter 503d.

  In the second embodiment, every time the changing signal received by the hall computer 500 is in the ON state indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is changing, the mode stay time corresponding to the value of the running mode memory The value of the counter (any one of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) is incremented by 1 to measure the mode stay time. However, the pachinko machine 10 is changing in place of the changing signal. The hall computer 500 that outputs the signal indicating the production mode set at the time and receives the signal, the corresponding mode stay time counter (any one of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) 1) may be added to measure the mode stay time.

  In the second embodiment, every time the changing signal received by the hall computer 500 is in the ON state indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is changing, the mode stay time corresponding to the value of the running mode memory The value of the counter (any one of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) is incremented by 1 and the mode stay time is measured. However, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes the first embodiment. The mode stay time counter 273b is provided in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the mode stay time counter 273b stores the value of the mode stay time counter 273b in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j in the first embodiment. The value may be output to the hall computer 500. In such a case, the hall computer 500 stores the received value in the mode stay time counter (any of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) corresponding to the value of the running mode memory 503a. Good. Alternatively, the hall computer 500 may store the received value in the mode total stay time memory (any of the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c) corresponding to the value of the running mode memory 503a. Good.

  Alternatively, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a mode stay time counter similar to the mode stay time counter 273b in the first embodiment is provided for each effect mode, and measurement by each mode stay time counter is continuously performed (that is, In other words, the mode residence time counter value may be output to the hall computer 500 as appropriate. In such a case, the hall computer 500 uses a mode stay time counter (any one of the first to third mode stay time counters 503b to 503d) or a mode total stay time memory (in accordance with the value of the running mode memory 503a). The received value may be stored in any one of the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c). The pachinko machine 10 clears the value of each mode stay time counter after outputting the value to the hall computer 500.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, the fluctuation time performed in the set production | presentation mode is measured, and the measured value is stored in mode total stay time memory (namely, 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 273h-273j, Any one of 504a to 504c). Instead, when the effect control device 117 receives a change pattern command from the main control device 110 without measuring (time keeping) the change time executed in the set effect mode, the received change pattern command is received. It is good also as a structure which accumulate | stores (adds) the variation time according to to the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the production mode at that time. With this configuration, it is not necessary to measure the variation time while monitoring the state of the variation display, so that the control burden can be reduced.

  In addition, at the timing when the production control device 117 sets the variation time according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 as the initial value of the variation time counter, the variation time according to the received variation pattern command is It is good also as a structure which accumulate | stores (adds) in the mode total stay time memory corresponding to presentation mode.

  Alternatively, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command at the timing when the variation display according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 by the effect control device 117 ends (that is, the timing to display the stop symbol), It is good also as a structure which accumulate | stores (adds) in the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the presentation mode at that time.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, the variation time performed in the set production | presentation mode is measured, and the measured value is used as it is for mode total stay time memory (namely, 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 273h-). 273j and any one of 504a to 504c). That is, in each of the above embodiments, the measured variation time is stored in the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the set effect mode as it is, regardless of the value of the special figure reservation ball number N. It was set as the structure to do.

  Instead of this, the measured variation time is corrected according to the value of the special figure reservation ball number N, and the corrected value is stored in the mode total stay time memory as the mode stay time. Also good. For example, after correcting the measured value by adding or accumulating a value corresponding to the value of the special figure reservation ball number N to the measured value, the corrected value is set to the setting mode as the mode stay time. It is good also as a structure accumulate | stored in a corresponding mode total residence time memory.

  Such a modification will be specifically described. As a first modification, in the first embodiment, the value of the special figure holding ball number N indicated by the hold number command every time the hold number command is received from the main control device 110 in the RAM 273 of the effect control device 117. When the value of the mode stay time counter 273b is added to any of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j (that is, the process of S1272 or S1305), After correcting the value of the mode stay time counter 273b by adding a value corresponding to the value of the special figure holding ball number N at that time as a weight value, the corrected value corresponds to the value of the mode selection counter 273a. Stored in the total stay time memories 273h to 273j.

  At this time, as the weight value to be integrated to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b, for example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N becomes small, the corrected value (that is, the value after integrating the weight value) becomes small. The weight value can be set as follows. For example, when the special figure reservation ball number N is 2 or 3, the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is smaller than the reference (that is, when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or less). Is set to 0.7, for example, and the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is larger than the reference (that is, when the special figure reservation ball number N is 4) may be set to 1.2, for example. In addition, the weight value in the case of the reference figure holding ball number N (2 or 3 in this example) as a reference is 1, and the mode total stay in which the actually measured value (value of the mode stay time counter 273b) should be added It adds to time memory 273h-273j as it is.

  Alternatively, for example, on the basis of the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 1, the weight value in this case (when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1) is set to 1, and the special figure reservation ball number N is 2 or more. It is good also as a value larger than 1 in the case where it is. For example, the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is 2 is 1.2, and the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is 3 or 4, is 1.5, When N is 2 or more, all the weight values may be 1.4.

  For example, on the basis of the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 4, the weight value in this case (when the special figure reservation ball number N is 4) is set to 1, and the special figure reservation ball number N is 3 or less. It is good also considering the weight value in the case of being less than 1 as a value. For example, the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is 2 or 3 is set to 0.8, and the weight value when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 is set to 0.6. When N is 3 or less, all the weight values may be set to 0.7.

  In general, in order to prevent the winning (entering) at the first entrance 64 from being wasted, the variation time of the variation display of the third symbol when the number N of special figure reservation balls is close to the maximum value is Compared with the case where the number N of special figure holding balls is small, it is configured in a short time. On the other hand, in the hall, it is often performed to adjust the difficulty of entering the first entrance 64 by adjusting a nail, but entering the first entrance 64 becomes difficult. When the nail is adjusted, there is a situation in which the number N of special figure reservation balls does not increase easily. In this case, a relatively long variation time (the number N of special figure reservation balls N (Variation time when there is little) tends to be added. For this reason, even if the number of variations displayed by the player (the number of variations) is the same depending on the condition of the nail adjustment, a difference occurs in the measured variation time (mode stay time), and each mode total stay time As the difference is accumulated (added) in the memories 273h to 273j, a difference may occur between the value of each mode total stay time memory 273h to 273j and the player's support for each effect mode. There is.

  On the other hand, by setting the weight value so that the value after correction becomes small when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N is small, the total stay time of each mode when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N is small Since the value to be added to the memories 273h to 273j can be made smaller, the difference in the mode stay time described above due to nail adjustment or the like can be suppressed, and the values stored in the mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j Can be accurately compared as a value that reflects the player's support level for each effect mode.

  In each example of the first modified example described above, the weight value is set so that the value after correction becomes smaller when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N becomes smaller. May be configured to set a weight value such that the corrected value increases as the value of the special figure reservation ball number N decreases.

  The first modification described above can also be applied to the second embodiment. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the main control device 110 is configured to output the hold number command not only to the effect control device 117 but also to the hall computer 500, and the main control device 110 stores the main control in the RAM 503 of the hall computer 500. A memory or a counter for setting the value of the special figure holding ball number N indicated by the hold number command every time a hold number command is received from the device 110 is provided, and each mode stay time counter 503b to 503d is processed by the processing of S2027. Is added to the corresponding total stay time memories 504a to 504c, the value of the mode stay time counter indicated by the value of the running mode memory 503a is indicated by the contents of the memory or counter provided as described above. After the value corresponding to the number of reserved balls N is integrated and corrected as a weight value, the corrected value is It is added to the total time spent memory.

  In addition, when the variation time according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 by the effect control device 117 is added to the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the effect mode at that time, the variation control command 117 The variation time may be stored in the corresponding mode total stay time memory after the weight value corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls is added and corrected. In such a case, the correction amount (that is, the weight value) corresponding to the number N of special figure reservation balls may be varied depending on the type of the variation pattern command.

  Further, as a second modification, in the first modification described above, the value of the mode stay time counter 273b is corrected by adding a weight value corresponding to the value of the special figure reservation ball number N. In other words, it is performed by adding or subtracting a value corresponding to the value of the special figure holding ball number N. Also in the second modified example, for example, when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N becomes small, the value after addition or subtraction (that is, the value after correction) is actually measured (mode stay time counter 273b). Addition or subtraction can be performed so as to be smaller than

  For example, when the special figure reservation ball number N is 2 or 3, and the special figure reservation ball number N is smaller than the reference (that is, when the special figure reservation ball number N is 1 or less), 2 is subtracted from the value of the mode stay time counter 273b (or -2 is added to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b), and the number of special figure reservation balls N is larger than the reference (that is, the number of special figure reservation balls N 3 is added to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b. In addition, in the case of the special figure holding ball number N (2 or 3 in this example) as a reference, the mode total stay time memory 273h to which the actually measured value (the value of the mode stay time counter 273b) should be added It adds to 273j as it is.

  Thus, by correcting so that the value after correction becomes small when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N is small, each mode total stay time memory 273h is similar to the case of the first modification described above. It is possible to accurately compare the values stored in .about.273j as values reflecting the player's support for each effect mode.

  For example, on the basis of the case where the special figure holding ball number N is 1, a value larger than the value actually measured when the special figure holding ball number N is 2 or more (the value of the mode stay time counter 273b). You may correct | amend so that it may become. For example, when the special figure holding ball number N is 2, the value of the mode stay time counter 273b is corrected by adding 1, and when the special figure holding ball number N is 3 or 4, the mode stay time Correction may be made by adding 4 to the value of the time counter 273b or by adding 3 to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b when the number N of special figure holding balls is 2 or more. Good.

  Further, for example, on the basis of the case where the special figure reservation ball number N is 4, a value smaller than the value actually measured when the special figure reservation ball number N is 3 or less (the value of the mode stay time counter 273b). You may correct | amend so that it may become. For example, when the special figure holding ball number N is 2, the value is corrected by subtracting 1 from the value of the mode stay time counter 273b (or adding -1 to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b). When the number of reserved balls N is 3, the value is corrected by subtracting 2 from the value of the mode stay time counter 273b (or adding -2 to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b), 1 is corrected by subtracting 3 from the value of the mode stay time counter 273b (or adding -3 to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b), or the special figure holding ball number N is 3 or less In this case, the value may be corrected by subtracting 2 from the value of the mode stay time counter 273b (or adding -2 to the value of the mode stay time counter 273b).

  In each example of the second modified example described above, when the value of the special figure reservation ball number N is small, the corrected value is corrected so as to be small. A configuration may be adopted in which the correction is performed so that the corrected value increases as the value of the number of balls N decreases.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, the value actually measured in one effect mode (the value of the mode stay time counter 273b) is corrected and then added to the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j. Instead of the (accumulating) configuration, the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are added without correcting the value of the mode stay time counter 273b, and the correction is made after a certain amount of accumulation is performed It is good also as a structure performed suitably. For example, a memory for updating and storing the number of times of change executed each time the change display is executed (referred to as “fluctuation number memory”), and a value corresponding to the value of the special figure holding ball number N at that time Is provided for each effect mode, and each time the variable display is executed, 1 is added to the memory for changing the number of times corresponding to the current effect mode. At the same time, in the reserved number memory for correction corresponding to the effect mode at that time, the reference number of reserved balls N (for example, 2 or 3) as a reference is set as a value corresponding to the number N of reserved special balls at that time. If it is zero, the special figure reservation ball number N to which -2 is added for correction (for example, 1 or less) is "-1", and the special figure reservation ball number N for which +2 is added for correction (for example, 4), add “+1”. Then, when the value of the variation number memory for a certain effect mode reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), the values of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j corresponding to the effect mode are It is good also as a structure correct | amended according to the value of the reserve number memory for correction | amendment corresponding to effect mode. Specifically, in this case, the value in the correction hold number memory is multiplied by 2, and the obtained value is added to the corresponding mode total stay time memory for correction. After correcting the values of the mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j, the values of the variation number memory and the correction hold number memory for the corrected effect mode are cleared.

  When the second modification described above is also applied to the second embodiment, in the second embodiment, the main control device 110 sends a hold number command not only to the effect control device 117 but also to the hall computer. 500, and the RAM 503 of the hall computer 500 sets the value of the special figure holding ball number N indicated by the holding number command every time the holding number command is received from the main controller 110, or A counter is provided, and when the value of each mode stay time counter 503b to 503d is added to the corresponding total stay time memory 504a to 504c by the process of S2027, the mode stay indicated by the value of the running mode memory 503a The value of the time counter corresponds to the number N of special figure holding balls indicated by the contents of the memory or counter provided as described above. After correcting added or subtracted to the may be added to the total residence time memory corresponding to the corrected value.

  In addition, when the variation time according to the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 by the effect control device 117 is added to the mode total stay time memory corresponding to the effect mode at that time, the variation control command 117 In addition, a value corresponding to the number of special figure reservation balls N at that time may be added to or subtracted from the change time and corrected, and then stored in the corresponding mode total stay time memory. In this case, the correction amount (that is, the value to be added or subtracted) according to the special figure reservation ball number N may be different depending on the type of the variation pattern command.

  Moreover, in each said embodiment, it was set as the structure which measures (time-measures) the variation time performed in the set production mode, and obtains mode stay time, but for every variation pattern command which can be received from the main control means 110, A value corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored as dedicated data used to count the mode stay time (hereinafter, this data is referred to as “time-only data”). When a variation pattern command is received, time-dedicated data corresponding to the received variation pattern command may be stored (added) in a mode total stay time memory corresponding to the effect mode at that time.

  For example, for a variation pattern command A having a basic variation time (ie, a variation time that is not adjusted according to the value of the special figure holding ball number N) of 7 seconds, a value indicating 7 seconds is used as time-measurement dedicated data. It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores in the production | presentation control apparatus 117, and memorize | stores the value which shows 12 seconds in the production | generation control apparatus 117 with respect to the fluctuation | variation pattern command B which shows the fluctuation time of 12 seconds of basic fluctuation times.

  By adopting such a configuration, the mode stay time can be uniquely obtained from the type of the fluctuation pattern command, so it is not necessary to measure the fluctuation time while monitoring the state of the fluctuation display, and the control burden can be reduced. it can.

  Further, the mode stay time stored in the mode total stay time memory can be set to a value that does not depend on the value of the special figure reservation ball number N. That is, for example, when the fluctuation pattern command A is received, the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (basic fluctuation time + 3 seconds) when the special figure holding ball number N is 1 or less, and the special figure holding ball number N is Even if it is 2 or 3, the basic variation time is 7 seconds, and when the special figure holding ball number N is 4, the variation pattern command A is 4 seconds (basic variation time-3 seconds). The value stored as the time-measurement dedicated data is 7 seconds regardless of the special figure holding ball number N. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command B is received, the fluctuation time is 20 seconds (basic fluctuation time + 7 seconds) when the special figure holding ball number N is 1 or less, and the special figure holding ball number N is 2. Is 15 seconds (basic variation time + 3 seconds), and when the special figure holding ball number N is 3, the basic fluctuation time is 12 seconds, and the special figure holding ball number N is 4. Even if it is 5 seconds (basic variation time-7 seconds), the value stored as time-dedicated data when the variation pattern command B is received is 12 seconds regardless of the value of the special figure holding ball number N. It becomes. As described above, the mode stay time stored in the mode total stay time memory can be set to a value that does not depend on the value of the special figure holding ball number N, and thus the above-described difference in mode stay time caused by nail adjustment or the like is suppressed. It is possible to accurately compare the values stored in the mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j and 504a to 504c as values reflecting the player's support level for each effect mode.

  In each of the above embodiments, the variation time executed in the set production mode is stored in the mode total stay time memory (that is, one of the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j and 504a to 504c). Although the configuration is such that the total mode stay time is accumulated, the configuration may be such that, instead of accumulating the variation time, the number of variation displays started in the set effect mode is accumulated. In such a case, the evaluation for each production mode can be made based on the accumulated number of times of display of fluctuation.

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is configured as a mechanical slide switch. However, other mechanical switches (for example, a rotary encoder) may be used. Or it is good also as a structure which makes it a push button type switch from which a setting value changes every time it operates, and memorize | stores the setting value set by this push button type switch in RAM273 supplied with the backup voltage by the backup capacitor 281. . In this case, the setting value stored in the RAM 273 is not initialized even when the power is turned on.

  In each of the above embodiments, the mode total stay time is accumulated and stored in the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j or the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c. However, the pachinko machine 10 or the hall computer 500 may be provided with a switch for initializing the values of the mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j and 504a to 504c.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, the fluctuation time performed in the set production | presentation mode is measured by the mode stay time counter 273b, and the measured value is accumulate | stored in the 1st-3rd mode total stay time memories 273h-273j. And memorize it. Instead, without providing the first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j, every time the setting of the effect mode is switched, the set effect mode and the variation time executed in the effect mode, It is good also as a structure which memorize | stores the data which matched these to predetermined | prescribed memory (for example, RAM273 etc.) at any time. That is, instead of accumulating (adding) and storing the variation time executed in each effect mode, for example, the variable display is performed for a total of T1 seconds in the first effect mode, and then in the second effect mode. When the variable display is performed for a total of T2 seconds and then the variable display is performed again for a total of T3 seconds in the first effect mode, the fact that the variable display of T1 seconds is performed in the memory in the first effect mode is performed. Data indicating that the variable display for T2 seconds was performed in the second effect mode, and data indicating that the variable display for T3 seconds was performed in the first effect mode It is good. In such a case, the hall computer 500, a portable terminal, a personal computer, or the like is used to read from the pachinko machine 10 data that associates the set production mode with the variation time executed in the production mode. What is necessary is just to process. For example, it may be configured to be displayed or printed out as a numerical value or graph without summing the read data in a reading destination device (for example, hall computer 500, portable terminal, personal computer, etc.) You may comprise so that the sum total of the variation time performed in each effect mode may be calculated, and the result may be displayed or printed out as a numerical value or a graph. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to calculate the sum of the variation times executed in each effect mode and display the result as a numerical value or a graph on the third symbol display device 81 or the like.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, the variation time performed in the set production | presentation mode is measured, and each measured value is accumulate | stored and memorize | stored in 1st-3rd mode total stay time memory 504a-503c, did. Instead, without providing the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 503c, every time the setting of the effect mode is switched, the set effect mode and the variation time executed in the effect mode, May be stored in a predetermined memory (for example, RAM 503, HDD 504, etc.) as needed. That is, instead of accumulating (adding) and storing the variation time executed in each effect mode, for example, the variable display is performed for a total of T1 seconds in the first effect mode, and then in the second effect mode. When the variable display is performed for a total of T2 seconds and then the variable display is performed again for a total of T3 seconds in the first effect mode, the fact that the variable display of T1 seconds is performed in the memory in the first effect mode is performed. Data indicating that the variable display for T2 seconds was performed in the second effect mode, and data indicating that the variable display for T3 seconds was performed in the first effect mode It is good. In such a case, the data may be configured to be displayed or printed out as a numerical value or a graph without summing up the data in which the set production mode and the variation time executed in the production mode are associated with each other. The total variation time executed in each effect mode may be calculated, and the result may be displayed or printed out as a numerical value or a graph.

  In each of the above embodiments, the value of the mode selection counter 273a or the running mode memory 503a is changed (that is, the effect mode is switched) every time the frame button 22 is operated at a predetermined time. When the operation interval of the frame button 22 is shorter than a predetermined period, the operation may be regarded as abnormal and the operation may be ignored.

  In the second embodiment, the hall computer 500 stores the total mode stay time based on the information output from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer 500 (the changing signal and the running mode data). The pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an infrared port or the like, output information from the infrared port, and store the mode total stay time in a portable terminal having an infrared communication function capable of receiving the information.

  In the first embodiment, the back mode switch 75 is provided so that it can be directly contacted from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but it cannot be touched unless it is covered with a cover and the cover is opened. It may be provided.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the effect mode is changed when the frame button 22 is operated during high-speed fluctuation or during the customer waiting effect. However, the operation of the frame button 22 capable of changing the effect mode is performed. The time is not limited to during high-speed fluctuation or during a customer waiting effect, and can be set as appropriate. For example, the effect mode can be changed by the frame button 22 only during the customer waiting effect.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the state where the special figure holding ball number N is 0 continues for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) after the end of the variable display, the main control unit 110 changes to the effect control device 117. A customer waiting effect command is output, whereby the effect control device 117 turns on the customer waiting effect flag 273d to determine that the customer waiting effect is being performed, and the change of the effect mode by the frame button 22 can be accepted. However, if the special figure holding ball number N is 0 after the end of the variable display, a command for enabling the change of the effect mode by the frame button 22 may be output.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although it was comprised so that a winning to the 1st entrance 64 and the passage of the 2nd entrance 67 might be suspended up to 4 times, respectively, the maximum number of times of suspension is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of times the variable display is held based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is different for the part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number or by dividing the number of four divided areas by the number of times of the hold. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding times is notified by the light emitting member. You may do it.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, the present invention may be applied to a so-called second type pachinko gaming machine having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as another game machine such as an alepacchi or a sparrow ball.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray.

  The concept of various inventions included in the gaming machine of the present invention and the various embodiments described above will be shown below.

  Display means capable of executing display effects, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and setting one display effect mode among the plurality of display effect modes The display effect is displayed on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A gaming machine comprising display control means, characterized by comprising mode switching designation means for enabling switching designation of one display effect mode initially set in the mode setting means when the power is turned on. A gaming machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect based on the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, when the power is turned on, one display effect mode designated by the mode change designation means is set in the mode setting means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is set as the mode change designation means. Can be specified by switching.

  Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated by the mode switching designation means so as to become an appropriate display effect mode according to the customer class of the hall, such as a display effect mode popular with the player. , It is possible to reduce the possibility of the situation where the player must play in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference, thereby suppressing the player from playing the game with low interest It becomes. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine A1, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine A1, and the mode of the gaming machine A1 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine A1 is an effect control device 117.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as the mode switching designation means of the gaming machine A1, the process of S1016 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment and the mode selection counter of the second embodiment The process of S1603 in a setting process (FIG. 30) and the process of S1021 in the starting process (FIG. 35) of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 of 3rd Embodiment are illustrated.

  In a gaming machine comprising display means capable of executing display effects and operation means operable by a player, effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes; A mode setting means for setting one display effect mode from among a plurality of display effect modes, and a display effect mode set in the mode setting means from effect data stored in the effect data storage means. Display control means for displaying the display effect on the display means using the corresponding effect data, and the display effect mode set in the mode setting means when the operation means is operated at a predetermined time. The mode switching means for switching to another display effect mode and the one display effect mode that is initially set in the mode setting means when the power is turned on. Gaming machine A2, characterized in that it comprises a mode switching designation means for constant.

  According to the gaming machine A2, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, when the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is performed at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode by the mode switching means. Switch to and set. Thereby, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode after switching is performed by the display control means. That is, the display effect is executed in the display effect mode after switching.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on, one display effect mode designated by the mode change designation means is set in the mode setting means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated as the mode change designation. Switching can be specified by means.

  Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated by the mode switching designation means so as to become an appropriate display effect mode according to the customer class of the hall, such as a display effect mode popular with the player. , To reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation that is inconvenient for the player (for example, a situation in which the player must play a display performance mode that is not his / her preference) due to the player's inability to use the operation means well Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the game with low interest. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine A2, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine A2, and the mode of the gaming machine A2 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine A2 is an effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming machine A2, and the mode switching means of the gaming machine A2 is S1206 in the effect mode change confirmation means (FIGS. 18 and 32). The process is illustrated.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode switching designation unit of the gaming machine A2 includes the processing of S1016 in the start-up processing (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment, and the mode selection counter of the second embodiment. The process of S1603 in a setting process (FIG. 30) and the process of S1021 in the starting process (FIG. 35) of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 of 3rd Embodiment are illustrated.

  The gaming machine A1 or A2 includes switching means capable of switching one display effect mode among the plurality of display effect modes by manual operation, and the mode switching designation means is the display effect mode switched by the switching means. A gaming machine A3, characterized in that the switching is designated.

  According to the gaming machine A3, the display effect mode switched by the switching means capable of switching one display effect mode among the plurality of display effect modes by the manual operation is specified by the mode switching specifying means. Therefore, since the first display effect mode after power-on can be set in advance by manual operation, the display effect mode can be set as appropriate before the power is turned on.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, back mode switch 75 is illustrated as a switching means of game machine A3.

  In the gaming machine A3, the switching means is configured as a mechanical switch that switches a contact point connected to a contact point associated with each of the plurality of display effect modes.

  According to the gaming machine A4, the switching means that can switch the display effect mode by manual operation is configured as a mechanical switch that switches a contact point connected to a contact point associated with each of the plurality of display effect modes. Thus, the setting is maintained until the contact is next switched. Therefore, once the switching means is operated so that the first display effect mode after power-on becomes a convenient (appropriate) display effect mode, that state is maintained until the next change is necessary. Can do. Therefore, the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A3 or A4, the switching means is provided on the back side of the gaming machine A5.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the switching means capable of switching the display effect mode by manual operation is provided on the back side of the gaming machine, the switching means is prevented from being operated by an unspecified number of people such as players. And the operator can be limited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent switching to an inconvenient display effect mode contrary to the intention of the hall, and more appropriately suppress the situation where the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference. be able to. In addition, the burden on the management of the display effect mode can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a mode setting period measuring unit that measures a period that satisfies a predetermined condition, and each of the plurality of display effect modes Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means and the mode setting period storage means capable of storing and storing the measured periods in association with the periods measured by the mode setting period measuring means And a period display means for displaying the period for at least some of the display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured period is stored in the mode setting period storage means. Accumulated and stored in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. Then, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage unit, the total period measured by the mode setting period measuring unit (that is, accumulated) for at least some display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes. Period) is displayed on the display means by the period display means.

  Therefore, since the period satisfying the predetermined condition can be displayed in each display effect mode, the usage status of each display effect mode can be visually transmitted, and the display contents are displayed for the first time after the power is turned on. This can be useful information when setting the mode (that is, switching designation of the display effect mode by the mode switching designation means).

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) In such a case, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's support level for each display effect mode. By referring to the content displayed on the display means by the mode change designation means by the mode change designation means, there is a possibility that the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference. Can be lowered more suitably.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine A6 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variable display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage means of the gaming machine A6 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified, and the period display means of the gaming machine A6 is exemplified by the process of S1015 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment. .

  The gaming machine A6 is provided with a fluctuation display execution means for displaying a fluctuation display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the fluctuation display execution means displays the fluctuation display of the identification information during a period that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine A7 characterized in that it is a period in which is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the mode setting period measuring unit measures the period of the variation display (variation display of identification information) executed by the variation display executing unit based on the establishment of the start condition as a period satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is the total period of variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition caused by the player playing the game, the execution period of the variation display is excellent because it reflects the game execution status by the player. It becomes an indicator. Therefore, the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode can be trusted as a value reflecting the player's support for each display effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation where the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference.

  In the gaming machine A7, when a start condition is satisfied during the execution of the variation display of the identification information by the variation display execution unit, the suspension unit holds the variation display of the identification information with respect to the establishment, and the suspension unit holds the hold. A hold count storage means for storing the hold count of the variable display of the identification information, and a measurement value for correcting the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means according to the hold count stored in the hold count storage means And the mode setting period storage means associates each of the plurality of display effect modes with the period measured by the mode setting period measuring means and corrected by the measurement value correcting means. A gaming machine A8 that is configured to be capable of storing and storing data.

  According to the gaming machine A8, when the execution period of one variation display is configured to be different depending on the number of suspensions, the suspension is performed from the period stored in the mode setting period storage means (total period of variation time). The influence of the number of times can be eliminated, and the reliability of the content stored in the mode setting period storage means (that is, the reliability as a value reflecting the player's support level for each display effect mode) can be further increased. .

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, each of the plurality of display effect modes is associated with a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the period is accumulated. A mode setting period storage means that can be stored, and a provision that stores a prescribed value in accordance with the predetermined condition when a predetermined condition is satisfied once while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means Each time the predetermined condition is satisfied once with the value storage means, the specified value corresponding to the predetermined condition stored in the specified value storage means is associated with the display effect mode being executed as the period, and the mode Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, the storage execution means for accumulating and storing in the setting period storage means, and at least a part of the plurality of display effect modes Gaming machine A9, characterized in that the period for Display presentation mode and a period display means for displaying on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, a predetermined value is provided for each predetermined condition, and the predetermined value is stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage unit every time the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the predetermined value is determined in each display effect mode. A period that satisfies the condition can be estimated. Therefore, since it is not necessary to actually measure the period that satisfies the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the control can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A9, the game machine A9 includes a fluctuation display execution means for displaying a fluctuation display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the specified value storage means has the identification information The specified value for the case where the fluctuation display is executed once is stored, and the storage execution means stores the specified value every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the fluctuation display execution means. The gaming machine A10 is characterized in that the specified value stored in the storage means is stored in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period.

  According to the gaming machine A10, every time when the variation display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution unit based on the establishment of the start condition, the defined value stored in the defined value storage unit is stored in the mode setting period. It is stored (accumulated) in the means. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the number of executions of the variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays a game, the number of executions of the variation display is an index that reflects the game execution status by the player. Become. Therefore, by using the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode, as a value reflecting the player's support for each display effect mode. The possibility of occurrence of a situation in which the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference can be suitably reduced.

  In the gaming machine A9, a variation display mode selection unit that selects a variation display mode of the identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and the variation display mode selection of the variation display of the identification information on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Fluctuation display execution means for displaying in a mode selected by the means, and the prescribed value storage means provides a prescribed value for a case where the fluctuation display execution means executes fluctuation display of the identification information once as a predetermined condition. The storage execution means is stored in the specified value storage means every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the change display execution means. Among the specified values, the specified value according to the mode of the variable display to be executed is stored in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period. Gaming machine A11, characterized in that is configured to store.

  According to the gaming machine A11, each time the variable display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition, the specified value according to the variation display mode is set to the mode setting period storage means. Is stored (accumulated). Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the mode of variation display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays the game, the value accumulated every time the variation display is performed is the game execution status by the player. It is an index that reflects In addition, since a specified value is provided for each variation display mode, the period stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means takes into account the variation in variation time due to the variation display mode. Since the reliability as a value reflecting the player's degree of support for the performance mode is further increased, the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which the player must play a game in a display performance mode that is not his / her preference is preferably reduced. it can.

  The gaming machine A1 or A2 includes receiving means for receiving a display effect mode output from an external device, and the mode switching designation means switches the display effect mode received by the receiving means when the power is turned on. A gaming machine A12 that is designated.

  According to the gaming machine A12, when the display effect mode output from the external device is received by the receiving means and the power is turned on, the received display effect mode is the first display effect after the power is turned on. The mode is designated by mode switching designation means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on in a plurality of gaming machines can be set (designated) by one external device, and the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced. it can. In addition, by storing information capable of determining the support level of the display effect mode in an external device and outputting the display effect mode according to the information, the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference. It is possible to easily reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation that must be performed.

  In each embodiment described above, the receiving unit of the gaming machine A12 is exemplified by the branching process to the Yes side in S1602 in the mode selection counter setting process (FIG. 30).

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, when the power is turned on, an output request unit that requests an external device to output information indicating the display effect mode, and the external device in response to a request by the output request unit A gaming machine A13, comprising: a receiving means for receiving the output display effect mode, wherein the mode switching designation means is for switching designation of the display effect mode received by the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine A13, when the power is turned on, the output request means requests the external device to output information indicating the display effect mode, and the display output from the external device in response to the request. The effect mode is received by the receiving means, and the received display effect mode is designated by the mode switching designation means as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on in a plurality of gaming machines can be set by one external device, and the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced. In addition, by storing information capable of determining the support level of the display effect mode in an external device and outputting the display effect mode according to the information, the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference. It is possible to easily reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation that must be performed.

  In each embodiment described above, the output request means of the gaming machine A13 is exemplified by the process of S1601 in the mode selection counter setting process (FIG. 30), and the receiving means of the gaming machine A13 is the mode selection counter setting process. The branching process to Yes side of S1602 in (FIG. 30) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit, a mode setting period measuring unit that measures a period that satisfies a predetermined condition, each of the plurality of display effect modes, and the mode Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, the mode setting period storage means capable of storing the period measured by the setting period measurement means, and among the plurality of display effect modes, Selecting means for selecting the display effect mode having the longest period, and the mode switching specifying means is for switching and specifying the display effect mode selected by the selecting means when the power is turned on. A gaming machine A14.

  According to the gaming machine A14, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured period is stored in the mode setting period storage means. It is stored in association with each of a plurality of display effect modes. Then, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, the display effect mode having the longest period measured by the mode setting period measuring means is selected by the selecting means from among the plurality of display effect modes. The display effect mode selected as described above is designated to be switched when the power is turned on.

  Therefore, among the plurality of display effect modes, the display effect mode having the longest period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is automatically set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on (that is, the display effect is displayed by the mode switching designation unit). Therefore, the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced.

  In addition, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, the execution period of the waiting time effect is excluded from the period in which the display effect mode is set to one of the variable time and the display time). The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's degree of support for each display effect mode, and the mode setting period measuring means. The display effect mode with the longest period measured by the above is the display effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on can be the display effect mode most supported by the player, so that the player plays the game in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation that must be made can be reduced more suitably.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine A14 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variable display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine A14 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified, and as the selection means in the gaming machine A14, the process of S1020 in the start-up process (FIG. 35) of the effect control device 117 of the third embodiment is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine A14, the game machine A14 includes a fluctuation display execution means for displaying a fluctuation display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition. A gaming machine A15 characterized in that it is a period in which is executed.

  According to the gaming machine A15, the period of variation display (variation display of identification information) executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition is measured by the mode setting period measurement means as a period that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is the total period of variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition caused by the player playing the game, the execution period of the variation display is excellent because it reflects the game execution status by the player. It becomes an indicator. Therefore, the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode can be trusted as a value reflecting the player's support for each display effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to suitably reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation where the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference.

  In the gaming machine A15, when a start condition is established during execution of the variation display of the identification information by the variation display execution unit, a suspension unit that suspends the variation display of the identification information with respect to the establishment, and the suspension unit holds A hold count storage means for storing the hold count of the variable display of the identification information, and a measurement value for correcting the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means according to the hold count stored in the hold count storage means And the mode setting period storage means associates each of the plurality of display effect modes with the period measured by the mode setting period measuring means and corrected by the measurement value correcting means. A gaming machine A16 that is configured to be capable of storing and storing data.

  According to the gaming machine A16, when the execution period of one variable display is configured to be different depending on the number of hold times, the hold is made from the period stored in the mode setting period storage means (total period of the change time). The influence of the number of times can be eliminated, and the reliability of the content stored in the mode setting period storage means (that is, the reliability as a value reflecting the player's support level for each display effect mode) can be further increased. .

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, each of the plurality of display effect modes is associated with a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the period is accumulated and stored. Possible mode setting period storage means and specified value storage means for storing a specified value for a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied once while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means according to the predetermined condition Each time the predetermined condition is satisfied, the mode setting period is stored in association with the display effect mode being executed as the predetermined value corresponding to the predetermined condition stored in the predetermined value storage means as the period. Based on the content stored in the mode setting period storage means and the storage execution means that accumulates and stores in the means, the display effect with the longest period among the plurality of display effect modes A selection means for selecting a game mode, and the mode switching designation means switches and designates the display effect mode selected by the selection means when the power is turned on. .

  According to the gaming machine A17, a predetermined value is provided for each predetermined condition, and the predetermined value is stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means every time the predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the predetermined value is determined in each display effect mode. A period that satisfies the condition can be estimated. Therefore, since it is not necessary to actually measure the period that satisfies the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the control can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A17, the game machine A17 includes a fluctuation display execution means for displaying a fluctuation display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of the start condition, and the specified value storage means is configured to execute the identification information by the fluctuation display execution means as a predetermined condition The specified value for the case where the fluctuation display is executed once is stored, and the storage execution means stores the specified value every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the fluctuation display execution means. A gaming machine A18 characterized in that the prescribed value stored in the storage means is stored and stored in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period.

  According to the gaming machine A18, every time the variation display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition, the specified value stored in the specified value storage means is stored in the mode setting period. It is stored (accumulated) in the means. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the number of executions of the variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays a game, the number of executions of the variation display is an index that reflects the game execution status by the player. Become. Therefore, by using the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode, as a value reflecting the player's support for each display effect mode. The possibility of occurrence of a situation in which the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference can be suitably reduced.

  In the gaming machine A17, a variation display mode selection unit that selects a variation display mode of the identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and a variation display mode selection of the variation display of the identification information on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Fluctuation display execution means for displaying in a mode selected by the means, and the prescribed value storage means provides a prescribed value for a case where the fluctuation display execution means executes fluctuation display of the identification information once as a predetermined condition. The storage execution means is stored in the specified value storage means every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the change display execution means. Among the specified values, the specified value according to the mode of the variable display to be executed is stored in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period. Gaming machine A19, characterized in that is configured to store Te.

  According to the gaming machine A19, every time when the variation display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition, the specified value according to the variation display mode is stored in the mode setting period storage means. Is stored (accumulated). Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the mode of variation display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays the game, the value accumulated every time the variation display is performed is the game execution status by the player. It is an index that reflects In addition, since a specified value is provided for each variation display mode, the period stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means takes into account the variation in variation time due to the variation display mode. Since the reliability as a value reflecting the player's degree of support for the performance mode is further increased, the possibility of occurrence of a situation in which the player must play a game in a display performance mode that is not his / her preference is preferably reduced. it can.

  A gaming machine A20 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A19, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A19, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  A gaming machine A22 according to any one of the gaming machines A1 to A19, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming system comprising a gaming machine having a control means and a management means configured to communicate with the gaming machine and managing the gaming machine, when the gaming machine is turned on, A gaming system A1 comprising mode switching designation means for switching and designating one display effect mode set in the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming system A1, in the gaming machine, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the effect corresponding to the display effect mode set as such A display effect by data is performed by the display control means. Here, when the power is turned on, one display effect mode designated by the mode change designation means is set in the mode setting means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is set as the mode change designation means. Can be specified by switching.

  Therefore, the gaming machine is provided with switching means for switching the display effect mode to be switched to the mode switching specification means, or the display effect mode received from the management means is set as the display effect mode to be switched to the mode switching specification means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated by the mode switching designation means so as to be an appropriate display effect mode according to the customer class of the hall, such as the display effect mode popular with the player. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference, thereby suppressing the player from playing the game with low interest. Is possible. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained.

  In each embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 is exemplified as the gaming machine of the gaming system A1, and the hall computer 500 is exemplified as the management means of the gaming system A1.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is illustrated as a display means of game system A1, character ROM275 is illustrated as an effect data control means of game system A1, and mode of game system A1 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming system A1 is an effect control device 117.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode switching designation means of the gaming system A1 includes the process of S1016 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment and the mode selection counter of the second embodiment. The process of S1603 in a setting process (FIG. 30) and the process of S1021 in the starting process (FIG. 35) of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 of 3rd Embodiment are illustrated.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. When the control means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode. A gaming system comprising a gaming machine having mode switching means for switching and setting, and a management means configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and to manage the gaming machine There are, when the power is turned on, the game system is characterized in that it comprises a mode switching designation means for switching specifying one display effect mode to be initially set to the mode setting means A2.

  According to the gaming system A2, in the gaming machine, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the effect corresponding to the display effect mode set as such A display effect by data is performed by the display control means. Here, when the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is performed at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode by the mode switching means. Switch to and set. Thereby, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode after switching is performed by the display control means. That is, the display effect is executed in the display effect mode after switching.

  On the other hand, when the power is turned on, one display effect mode designated by the mode change designation means is set in the mode setting means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated as the mode change designation. Switching can be specified by means.

  Therefore, the gaming machine is provided with switching means for switching the display effect mode to be switched to the mode switching specification means, or the display effect mode received from the management means is set as the display effect mode to be switched to the mode switching specification means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on is designated by the mode switching designation means so as to be an appropriate display effect mode according to the customer class of the hall, such as the display effect mode popular with the player. Therefore, the possibility of occurrence of a situation inconvenient for the player (for example, a situation where the player has to play a game in a display performance mode that is not his / her preference) due to the player's inability to use the operation means well is reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the player from playing a game with low interest. As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained.

  In each embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 is exemplified as the gaming machine of the gaming system A2, and the hall computer 500 is exemplified as the management means of the gaming system A2.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming system A2, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming system A2, and the mode of the gaming system A2 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming system A2 is an effect control device 117.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming system A2, and the mode switching means of the gaming system A2 is S1206 in the effect mode change confirmation means (FIGS. 18 and 32). The process is illustrated.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode switching designation means of the gaming system A2 includes the process of S1016 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment and the mode selection counter of the second embodiment. The process of S1603 in a setting process (FIG. 30) and the process of S1021 in the starting process (FIG. 35) of the production | presentation control apparatus 117 of 3rd Embodiment are illustrated.

  In the gaming system A1 or A2, the gaming machine includes switching means capable of switching one display effect mode among the plurality of display effect modes by manual operation, and the mode switching designation unit is turned on when the power is turned on. In addition, the game system A3 is characterized in that the display effect mode switched by the switching means is switched.

  According to the gaming system A3, when the gaming machine is provided with switching means capable of switching one display effect mode among a plurality of display effect modes by manual operation, and the power is turned on, the display switched by the switching means. The effect mode is designated for switching by the mode switching designation means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on can be set in advance by manual operation on the gaming machine side, and the display effect mode can be set as appropriate before turning on the power.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, back mode switch 75 is illustrated as a switching means of game system A3.

  In the gaming system A1 or A2, the management means includes display effect mode output means for outputting a display effect mode to be switched and specified by the mode switch specifying means to the gaming machine at a predetermined time, and the gaming machine includes the Receiving means for receiving the display effect mode output by the display effect mode output means of the management means is provided, and the mode switch specifying means switches and specifies the display effect mode received by the receiving means when the power is turned on. A gaming system A4 characterized by being a thing.

  According to the gaming system A4, the display effect mode to be switched and specified by the mode switching specifying means of the gaming machine is a display effect at a predetermined time (for example, an output instruction from the management means, an output request from the gaming machine, or periodically). It is output to the gaming machine by the mode output means. The display effect mode output from the management means by the display effect mode output means is received by the receiving means of the gaming machine. Then, when the power is turned on, the display effect mode received in this way is designated by the mode switching designation means as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on in a plurality of gaming machines can be set (designated) by one management means, and the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced. . Further, by storing information capable of determining the support level of the display effect mode in the management means and outputting the display effect mode corresponding to the information, the player must not play in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. It is possible to easily reduce the possibility of occurrence of an unforeseen situation.

  In each embodiment described above, the display effect mode output means of the gaming system A4 is exemplified by the processes of S2005 and S2006 in the data reception process (FIG. 33), and the receiving means of the gaming system A4 is a mode selection counter. The branch process to the Yes side of S1602 in the setting process (FIG. 30) is illustrated.

  In the gaming system A1 or A2, when the gaming machine is turned on, the gaming machine outputs an output requesting unit that requests the management unit to output information indicating the display effect mode, and the output requesting unit responds to the request by the output requesting unit. Receiving means for receiving the display effect mode output from the management means, wherein the mode switching designation means switches and designates the display effect mode received by the receiving means, and the management means includes the output request A game system A5, comprising: a display effect mode output means for outputting a display effect mode to be switched and specified by the mode switch specifying means to the gaming machine when the request output by the means is received.

  According to the gaming system A5, when the power is turned on, the output of the information indicating the display effect mode is requested to the management means by the output request means, and when the request is received by the management means, the gaming machine The display effect mode to be switched and specified by the mode switch specifying means is output to the gaming machine by the display effect mode output means of the management means. When the display effect mode thus output is received by the receiving means of the gaming machine, the received display effect mode is designated by the mode switching designation means as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on in a plurality of gaming machines can be set by one external device, and the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced. In addition, by storing information capable of determining the support level of the display effect mode in an external device and outputting the display effect mode according to the information, the player must play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference. It is possible to easily reduce the possibility of occurrence of a situation that must be performed.

  In each embodiment described above, the output request unit of the gaming system A5 is exemplified by the process of S1601 in the mode selection counter setting process (FIG. 30), and the display effect mode output unit of the gaming system A5 is a data reception unit. The process of S2005 and S2006 in the process (FIG. 33) is exemplified, and the receiving means of the gaming system A4 is exemplified by the branch process to the Yes side of S1602 in the mode selection counter setting process (FIG. 30).

  In the gaming system A4 or A5, the gaming machine outputs period information capable of acquiring a period satisfying a predetermined condition to the management means while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. And when the period information output by the period information output means is received, the management means is based on the period information while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Mode setting period acquisition means for acquiring a period satisfying a predetermined condition, mode setting period storage means capable of storing each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means in association with each other; Based on the content stored in the mode setting period storage means, the display effect mode having the longest period among the plurality of display effect modes. Selecting display means, and the display effect mode output means outputs the display effect mode selected by the selecting means to the gaming machine as a display effect mode to be switched by the mode switch specifying means. A gaming system A6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming system A6, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition is output to the management means by the period information output means of the gaming machine. Is done. In the management means, based on the received period information, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine is acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means. The period thus acquired is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, the display effect mode having the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set is selected from among the plurality of display effect modes. The display effect mode selected by the means is output to the gaming machine by the display effect mode output means as the display effect mode to be switched by the mode switching specifying means.

  Therefore, among the plurality of display effect modes, the display effect mode having the longest period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is automatically set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on (that is, the display effect is displayed by the mode switching designation unit). Therefore, the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced.

  In addition, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, the execution period of the waiting time effect is excluded from the period in which the display effect mode is set to one of the variable time and the display time). The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's degree of support for each display effect mode, and one display effect mode. The display effect mode with the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition during the setting of is the display effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on can be the display effect mode most supported by the player, so that the player plays the game in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation that must be made can be reduced more suitably.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the period information output means of the gaming system A6 includes the processes of S1208 and S1209 in the effect mode change confirmation process (FIG. 32) of the second embodiment and the effect control device of the second embodiment. S1111 in the main process 117 (FIG. 31), S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), and S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. Processing is exemplified.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as a mode setting period acquisition means of game system A6, the process of S2022 and S2027 in a changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34) is illustrated, and as a mode setting period storage means of gaming system A6 The first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are exemplified, and the selection process of the gaming system A6 is exemplified by the process of S2004 in the data reception process (FIG. 33).

  In the gaming system A1 or A2, the gaming machine outputs period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition to the management means while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. And when the period information output by the period information output means is received, the management means is based on the period information while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Mode setting period acquisition means for acquiring a period satisfying a predetermined condition, mode setting period storage means capable of storing each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means in association with each other; The contents stored for each of the plurality of display effect modes stored in the mode setting period storage means are output to the gaming machine at a predetermined time. A display effect mode output means, and the gaming machine selects a display effect mode with the longest period among the plurality of display effect modes based on the content output by the display effect mode output means The gaming system A7 is characterized in that the mode switching designation means of the gaming machine is for switching designation of the display effect mode selected by the selection means when the power is turned on.

  According to the gaming system A7, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition is output to the management means by the period information output means of the gaming machine. Is done. In the management means, based on the received period information, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine is acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means. The period thus acquired is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. The contents stored in the mode setting period storage means are output to the gaming machine by the display effect mode output means at a predetermined time (for example, an output instruction from the management means, an output request from the gaming machine, or periodically). The When the gaming machine is turned on, one display effect mode is set out of the plurality of display effect modes based on the contents output from the management means (contents output by the display effect mode output means). The display effect mode with the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition is selected by the selecting means, and the display effect mode selected as such is switched and specified when the power is turned on.

  Therefore, among the plurality of display effect modes, the display effect mode having the longest period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is automatically set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on (that is, the display effect is displayed by the mode switching designation unit). Therefore, the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced.

  In addition, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, the execution period of the waiting time effect is excluded from the period in which the display effect mode is set to one of the variable time and the display time). The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's degree of support for each display effect mode, and one display effect mode. The display effect mode with the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition during the setting of is the display effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on can be the display effect mode most supported by the player, so that the player plays the game in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation that must be made can be reduced more suitably.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the period information output means of the gaming system A6 includes the processes of S1208 and S1209 in the effect mode change confirmation process (FIG. 32) of the second embodiment and the effect control device of the second embodiment. S1111 in the main process 117 (FIG. 31), S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), and S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110. Processing is exemplified.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as a mode setting period acquisition means of game system A6, the process of S2022 and S2027 in a changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34) is illustrated, and as a mode setting period storage means of gaming system A6 The first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are exemplified.

  In the gaming system A6 or A7, the gaming machine includes mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the period of the gaming machine The information output means associates the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means and the display effect mode as the measurement target, and outputs the period information to the management means as a gaming system A8. .

  According to the gaming system A8, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine, and the period thus measured is measured. It is associated with the display effect mode that is the measurement target, and is output as period information to the management means by the period information output means. Thereby, it is possible to accumulate a period satisfying a predetermined condition during execution of one display effect mode in the gaming machine on the management means side (mode setting period storage means of the management means). Therefore, it is possible to store the period in both the gaming machine and the management means, or prevent the gaming machine from accumulating the period. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each embodiment described above, the processing of S1307 in the variable display process (FIG. 21) is exemplified as the set period measuring means of the gaming system A8.

  In the gaming system A6 or A7, the gaming machine has a mode setting period measuring unit that measures a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit, and the plurality of display effect modes. A gaming machine-side mode setting period storage means capable of storing each of them in association with a period measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and a period information output means of the gaming machine is the gaming machine-side mode setting period storage The game system A9 is characterized in that the content stored in the means is output to the management means as the period information.

  According to the gaming system A9, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine, and the period thus acquired is The game machine side mode setting period storage means stores the information in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. The contents stored in the gaming machine mode setting period storage unit are output as period information to the management unit by the period information output unit. Thereby, it is possible to accumulate a period satisfying a predetermined condition during execution of one display effect mode in the gaming machine on the management means side (mode setting period storage means of the management means). Therefore, it is possible to store the period in both the gaming machine and the management means, or prevent the gaming machine from accumulating the period. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming system A8 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variable display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage means of the gaming system A8 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified.

  In the gaming system A6 or A7, the period information output means of the gaming machine includes mode information output means for outputting information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means to the management means, and the player is playing a game. And a game information output means for outputting information indicating that the information is to the management means. The mode setting period acquisition means of the management means includes the information output by the mode information output means and the game Based on the information output by the information output means, the gaming system A10 is characterized in that it acquires a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means.

  According to the gaming system A10, information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is output to the management means by the mode information output means (part of the period information output means) of the gaming machine, while the game Information indicating that the player is playing a game (for example, the fact that the symbol is variably displayed or the state of the game medium being launched) is displayed by the gaming machine information output means (part of the period information output means). Output to management means.

  Therefore, on the management means side, the period during which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode can be detected, and the period can be accumulated and stored in the mode setting period storage means of the management means. Thereby, the period can be stored in both the gaming machine and the management means, or the period can be prevented from being accumulated on the gaming machine side. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as mode information output means of game system A10, the process of S1208 and S1209 in the presentation mode change confirmation process (FIG. 32) of 2nd Embodiment, and the presentation control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment The process of S1111 in the main process (FIG. 31) of 117 is illustrated, and the in-game information output means of the gaming system A10 includes the processes of S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), The process of S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 is exemplified.

  In any one of the gaming systems A6 to A10, the management means, based on the content stored in the mode setting period storage means when at a predetermined operation, at least part of the plurality of display effect modes A game system A11 comprising a period output means for outputting a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means for the display effect mode.

  According to the gaming system A11, when a predetermined operation is performed on the management means, at least a part of the plurality of display effect modes is based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means of the management means. For the display effect mode, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine is output by the period output means. Note that, for example, a display device or a printing device connected to the management unit, or a gaming machine connected to the management unit can be set as the output destination of the period.

  Therefore, since the period that satisfies the predetermined condition can be output in each display effect mode, the usage status of each display effect mode can be transmitted, and the display content is set to the first display effect mode after power-on. This can be useful information when the display effect mode is switched (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In particular, if the output is a visual output such as display or printing, the usage status of each display effect mode is visually transmitted, and thus the status is easily recognized.

  In any one of the gaming systems A3 to A11, the gaming machine includes switching means capable of switching one display effect mode from among the plurality of display effect modes by manual operation, and the mode switching designation means supplies power. When the game system A12 is turned on, the display effect mode switched by the switching means is specified if a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming system A12, when a gaming machine is provided with switching means capable of switching one display effect mode among a plurality of display effect modes by manual operation, and when the power is turned on, a predetermined condition (for example, switching means) If a signal indicating that the switching by the switching means is input and a signal indicating that the switching by the switching means is not input) are satisfied, the display switched by the switching means is satisfied. The effect mode is designated for switching by the mode switching designation means. Therefore, the first display effect mode after power-on can be set in advance by manual operation on the gaming machine side, and the display effect mode can be set as appropriate before turning on the power.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, back mode switch 75 is illustrated as a switching means of game system A12.

  A gaming system A13 according to any one of the gaming systems A1 to A12, wherein the gaming machine is any one of the gaming machines A10 to A12.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A gaming machine having a control unit and a management unit configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and managing the gaming machine, a display effect mode to be set in the mode setting unit for the first time after power-on is predetermined Management means A1 comprising a display effect mode output means for outputting to the gaming machine at the time of

  According to the management means A1, the display effect mode to be set in the mode setting means first after the power is turned on is a predetermined time (for example, an output instruction input to the management means, an output request from the gaming machine, or periodically). Is output to the gaming machine by the display effect mode output means. Thereby, the display effect mode output from the management means by the display effect mode output means is set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on. Therefore, by making the display effect mode output by the display effect mode output means become an appropriate display effect mode (for example, a display effect mode popular with the player) according to the customer class of the hall, It is possible to reduce the possibility of a situation in which a player has to play a game in a display effect mode that is not his / her preference, thereby suppressing the player from playing a game with low interest. . As a result, the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased, and a situation suitable for the hall can be obtained. In addition, the first display effect mode after power-on in a plurality of gaming machines can be set by one management means, and the burden on the setting of the first display effect mode after power-on can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, examples of the display effect mode output means of the management means A1 include the processes of S2005 and S2006 in the data reception process (FIG. 33).

  In the management means A1, when one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, when period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition is received from the gaming machine, the period information is based on the period information. Acquired by a mode setting period acquisition means for acquiring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, each of the plurality of display effect modes, and the mode setting period acquisition means Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means and the mode setting period storage means capable of storing the period in association with each other, the display effect mode having the longest period among the plurality of display effect modes is selected. The display effect mode output means is configured to display the display effect mode selected by the selection means first before the power is turned on. Management means A2, wherein the display effect mode to be set in the mode setting means and outputs it to the gaming machine.

  According to the management means A2, when one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, when period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition is received from the gaming machine, the management means A2 is based on the received period information. Thus, the mode setting period acquisition unit acquires a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit of the gaming machine. The period thus acquired is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. Based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, the display effect mode having the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set is selected from among the plurality of display effect modes. The display effect mode selected by the means is output to the gaming machine by the display effect mode output means as the display effect mode to be set in the mode setting means first after the power is turned on.

  Therefore, the display effect mode with the longest period that satisfies the predetermined condition among the plurality of display effect modes is automatically set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on, so the first display effect after the power is turned on The burden on mode setting can be reduced.

  In addition, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, the execution period of the waiting time effect is excluded from the period in which the display effect mode is set to one of the variable time and the display time). The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's degree of support for each display effect mode, and one display effect mode. The display effect mode with the longest period satisfying the predetermined condition during the setting of is the display effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on can be the display effect mode most supported by the player, so that the player plays the game in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation that must be made can be reduced more suitably.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the mode setting period acquisition unit of the management unit A2 is exemplified by the processing of S2022 and S2027 in the changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34), and the mode setting period storage unit of the management unit A2 The first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are exemplified, and the selection means of the management means A2 is exemplified by the process of S2004 in the data reception process (FIG. 33).

  In the management means A1 or A2, when one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, when period information that can acquire a period satisfying a predetermined condition is received from the gaming machine, based on the period information , Acquired by a mode setting period acquisition means for acquiring a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and each of the plurality of display effect modes and the mode setting period acquisition means Mode setting period storage means capable of storing the associated periods in association with each other, and when a predetermined operation is performed, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, in the plurality of display effect modes Period when a predetermined condition is satisfied while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means for at least some display effect modes Characterized in that it comprises a time output means for outputting the management unit A3.

  According to the management means A3, when one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, when period information that can acquire a period satisfying the predetermined condition is received from the gaming machine, the management means A3 is based on the received period information. Thus, the mode setting period acquisition unit acquires a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit of the gaming machine. The period thus acquired is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. And when predetermined operation is performed with respect to the management means, based on the content memorize | stored in the mode setting period memory | storage means of this management means, it is set to at least one display effect mode in several display effect modes On the other hand, the period output means outputs a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine. Note that, for example, a display device or a printing device connected to the management unit, or a gaming machine connected to the management unit can be set as the output destination of the period.

  Therefore, since the period that satisfies the predetermined condition can be output in each display effect mode, the usage status of each display effect mode can be transmitted, and the display content is set to the first display effect mode after power-on. This can be useful information when the display effect mode is switched (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In particular, if the output is a visual output such as display or printing, the usage status of each display effect mode is visually transmitted, and thus the status is easily recognized.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period that satisfies a predetermined condition, and each of the plurality of display effect modes And a mode setting period storage means capable of storing and storing the measured periods in association with the periods measured by the mode setting period measuring means. Gaming machine B1, wherein are.

  According to the gaming machine B1, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect based on the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured periods are stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effects. Accumulated and stored in association with each mode.

  Therefore, since the total period (that is, the accumulated period) of the periods satisfying the predetermined conditions can be compared between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's level of support for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode or for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B1, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B1, and the mode of the gaming machine B1 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine B1 is an effect control device 117.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine B1 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variable display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine B1 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. When the control means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode. In a gaming machine comprising mode switching means for switching and setting, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Mode setting period measuring means for measuring, mode setting period storage capable of storing and storing the measured periods in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes and the periods measured by the mode setting period measuring means And a gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect based on the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, when the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is performed at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode by the mode switching means. Switch to and set. Thereby, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode after switching is performed by the display control means. That is, the display effect is executed in the display effect mode after switching.

  Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured periods are stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effects. Accumulated and stored in association with each mode.

  Therefore, since the total period (that is, the accumulated period) of the periods satisfying the predetermined conditions can be compared between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's level of support for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode or for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B2, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B2, and the mode of the gaming machine B2 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine B2 is an effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine B2, and the mode switching means of the gaming machine B2 is S1206 in the effect mode change confirmation means (FIGS. 18 and 32). The process is illustrated.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period measurement unit of the gaming machine B2 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variation display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine B2 includes the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, on the basis of the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, period display means for displaying the period for at least some display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes on the display means. A gaming machine B3 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine B3, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage unit, the period measured by the mode setting period measuring unit for at least some display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes is: It is displayed on the display means by the period display means. Therefore, since the period which satisfy | filled the predetermined condition in each display effect mode can be displayed, the use condition of each display effect mode can be transmitted visually.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) In this case, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's support level for each display effect mode. The contents can be useful information when setting the first display effect mode after the power is turned on (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In addition, at a predetermined time (for example, when the hall is closed), by confirming the contents displayed on the display means by the period display means for a certain period, future game machine development can be performed. Useful information can be obtained.

  In each embodiment described above, the period display means of the gaming machine B3 is exemplified by the process of S1015 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, when the power is turned on, the display effect mode having the longest period among the plurality of display effect modes based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means The game machine B4, wherein the selection means for selecting the game mode and the mode setting means are for setting the display effect mode selected by the selection means.

  According to the gaming machine B4, when the power is turned on, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage unit, the period measured by the mode setting period measurement unit among the plurality of display effect modes. The longest display effect mode is selected by the selection means.

  Therefore, among the plurality of display effect modes, the display effect mode having the longest period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied can be automatically set as the first display effect mode after the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's support for each display effect mode, and the mode setting period measuring means The display effect mode with the longest period measured by the above is the display effect mode most supported by the player. Therefore, in such a case, the first display effect mode after the power is turned on can be the display effect mode most supported by the player, so that the player plays the game in the display effect mode that is not his / her preference. The possibility of occurrence of the situation that must be made can be reduced more suitably.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, examples of the means for selecting the gaming machine B4 include the processing of S1020 in the start-up processing (FIG. 35) of the effect control device 117 of the third embodiment.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a main power supply is provided, and the mode setting period storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored contents even when power supply from the main power supply is disabled. A gaming machine B5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B5, even if the power supply from the main power supply is disabled, the storage contents of the mode setting period storage unit are retained, so that a plurality of periods measured by the mode setting period measurement unit are stored. Can accumulate over the day. Therefore, the usefulness as information increases and the accuracy of evaluation for each display effect mode can be improved.

  In each embodiment described above, the power supply device 115 is exemplified as the main power source of the gaming machine B5.

  Any of the gaming machines B1 to B5 includes a main power source and a sub power source different from the main power source, and the mode setting period storage unit is configured to be able to hold the stored contents by power supply by the sub power source. A gaming machine B6 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B6, even if the power supply from the main power supply is disabled, the storage contents of the mode setting period storage means are retained by the power supply by the sub power supply, so the mode setting period measurement means The period measured by can be accumulated over a plurality of days. Therefore, the usefulness as information increases and the accuracy of evaluation for each display effect mode can be improved.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the main power source of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by the power supply device 115, and the sub power source of the gaming machine B6 is exemplified by the backup capacitor 281.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B6 comprises an information output means for outputting the stored contents stored in the mode setting period storage means to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine B7, since the storage contents stored in the mode setting period storage means are output to the outside by the information output means, the mode setting period is stored in an output destination management device or an external information processing device or an external storage medium. The storage content stored in the storage means can be saved.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B6, information output means for outputting the storage contents stored in the mode setting period storage means so as to be stored in storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine A gaming machine B8 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine B8, the storage content stored in the mode setting period storage means is output by the information output means so that it can be stored in the storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine. The storage contents stored in the mode setting period storage unit can be stored in the storage unit or external storage medium of the output destination management apparatus or external information processing apparatus.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the game machine includes a variation display execution unit that displays a variation display of the identification information on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition, and during the period that satisfies the predetermined condition, the variation display execution unit A gaming machine B9, characterized in that it is a period during which a variable display of identification information is executed.

  According to the gaming machine B9, the mode setting period measuring unit measures the period of variation display (variation display of identification information) executed by the variation display execution unit based on the establishment of the start condition as a period satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is the total period of variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition caused by the player playing the game, the execution period of the variation display is excellent because it reflects the game execution status by the player. It becomes an indicator. Therefore, the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode can be trusted as a value reflecting the player's support for each display effect mode. Therefore, the reliability of the evaluation for each display effect mode performed based on the total period of the variable display is increased, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can more appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  In the gaming machine B9, when a start condition is established during execution of the variation display of the identification information by the variation display execution unit, a suspension unit that suspends the variation display of the identification information with respect to the establishment, and the suspension unit holds A hold count storage means for storing the hold count of the variable display of the identification information, and a measurement value for correcting the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means according to the hold count stored in the hold count storage means And the mode setting period storage means associates each of the plurality of display effect modes with the period measured by the mode setting period measuring means and corrected by the measurement value correcting means. A gaming machine B10 that is configured to be capable of storing and storing data.

  According to the gaming machine B10, when the execution period of one variation display is configured to be different depending on the number of suspensions, suspension is performed from the period (total period of variation time) stored in the mode setting period storage unit. The influence of the number of times can be eliminated, and the reliability of the content stored in the mode setting period storage means (that is, the reliability as a value reflecting the player's support level for each display effect mode) can be further increased. .

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine having a control means, each of the plurality of display effect modes is associated with a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the period is accumulated. And a mode setting period storage means that can be stored and a rule for a case where a predetermined condition is satisfied once while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Specified value storage means for storing a value according to the predetermined condition, and each time the predetermined condition is satisfied, the specified value according to the predetermined condition stored in the specified value storage means is executed as the period. A gaming machine B11 comprising storage execution means for storing and storing in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display display mode in the middle.

  According to the gaming machine B11, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, every time the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the specified value according to the predetermined condition stored in the specified value storage means is associated with the display effect mode being executed as the period satisfying the predetermined condition, and the mode setting period Since it is accumulated and stored in the storage means, it is possible to estimate the period during which the predetermined condition is satisfied in each display effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to compare the period satisfying the predetermined condition between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, thereby providing a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall circumstances. Is possible. Further, at this time, it is not necessary to actually measure a period that satisfies the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, so that the control can be facilitated.

  Here, when the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, establishment of a start condition, execution of a variable display, launch of a ball, etc.), the mode The content stored in the setting period storage means reflects the player's support for each display effect mode, so the first display effect mode after power-on can be set appropriately, and future game machine development It can be used as useful information for performing

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B11, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B11, and the mode of the gaming machine B11. An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine B11 is an effect control device 117.

  The gaming machine B11 includes a fluctuation display execution means for displaying a fluctuation display of the identification information on the display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and the specified value storage means performs the identification information as a predetermined condition by the fluctuation display execution means. The specified value for the case where the fluctuation display is executed once is stored, and the storage execution means stores the specified value every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the fluctuation display execution means. A gaming machine B12 characterized in that the prescribed value stored in the storage means is stored in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period.

  According to the gaming machine B12, each time the variation display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition, the specified value stored in the specified value storage means is stored in the mode setting period. It is stored (accumulated) in the means. Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the number of executions of the variable display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays a game, the number of executions of the variation display is an index that reflects the game execution status by the player. Become. Accordingly, the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode, the first display effect mode after power-on is appropriately set, and future games It can be used as useful information for machine development.

  In the gaming machine B11, a variation display mode selection unit that selects a variation display mode of the identification information based on the establishment of the start condition, and a variation display mode selection of the variation display of the identification information on the display unit based on the establishment of the start condition. Fluctuation display execution means for displaying in a mode selected by the means, and the prescribed value storage means provides a prescribed value for a case where the fluctuation display execution means executes fluctuation display of the identification information once as a predetermined condition. The storage execution means is stored in the specified value storage means every time the change display of the identification information is executed once by the change display execution means. Among the specified values, the specified value according to the mode of the variable display to be executed is stored in the mode setting period storage means in association with the display effect mode being executed as the period. Gaming machine B13, characterized in that is configured to store Te.

  According to the gaming machine B13, every time when the variation display (variation display of identification information) is executed by the variation display execution means based on the establishment of the start condition, the specified value according to the variation display mode is stored in the mode setting period storage means. Is stored (accumulated). Therefore, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means is a value corresponding to the mode of variation display executed in each display effect mode. Since the variation display of the identification information is performed based on the establishment of the start condition that occurs when the player plays the game, the value accumulated every time the variation display is performed is the game execution status by the player. It is an index that reflects In addition, since a specified value is provided for each variation display mode, the period stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means takes into account the variation in variation time due to the variation display mode. In order to further increase the reliability as a value reflecting the player's degree of support for the effect mode, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means, that is, the total period of the variable display executed in each display effect mode, It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode after the power is turned on or for future game machine development.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period that satisfies a predetermined condition, and the mode setting period measuring means A game machine B14, comprising information output means for associating and outputting the displayed period and the display effect mode to be measured to the outside

  According to the gaming machine B14, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured period corresponds to the display effect mode to be measured. The information is output by the information output means.

  Accordingly, since the period satisfying the predetermined condition in each display effect mode can be accumulated and stored in the output destination management apparatus or the external information processing apparatus or the external storage medium, the information stored in the output destination Based on the above, it is possible to compare the period satisfying the predetermined condition between the display effect modes. Thereby, evaluation with respect to each display effect mode can be performed, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The information stored at the output destination by the information output means reflects the player's support level for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode after the launch or for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B14, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B14, and the mode of the gaming machine B14 The setting means is exemplified by a mode selection counter 273a, the display control means of the gaming machine B14 is exemplified by an effect control device 117, and the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine B14 is exemplified by a variable display process (FIG. 21). The process of S1307 in FIG.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period that satisfies a predetermined condition, and the mode setting period measuring means The predetermined period can be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine by associating the displayed period with the display effect mode to be measured. Gaming machine B15, characterized in that an information output means for sea urchin output.

  According to the gaming machine B15, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured period corresponds to the display effect mode to be measured. In addition, the information output means outputs the information so that it can be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine.

  Therefore, since the period satisfying the predetermined condition in each display effect mode can be accumulated and stored in the storage device or the external storage medium of the output destination management device or the external information processing device, it is stored at the output destination. Based on the stored information, it is possible to compare the period satisfying the predetermined condition between the display effect modes. Thereby, evaluation with respect to each display effect mode can be performed, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The information stored at the output destination by the information output means reflects the player's support level for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode after the launch or for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B15, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B15, and the mode of the gaming machine B15. The setting means is exemplified by a mode selection counter 273a, the display control means of the gaming machine B15 is exemplified by an effect control device 117, and the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine B15 is exemplified by variable display processing (FIG. 21). The process of S1307 in FIG.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means, mode information output means for outputting information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means to the outside, and information indicating that the player is playing a game to the outside A gaming machine B16 comprising an in-game information output means for outputting.

  According to the gaming machine B16, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from the plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, the information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is output to the outside by the mode information output means, while the information indicating that the player is playing (for example, the symbol is variably displayed) And the game medium launch status) are output to the outside by the in-game information output means.

  Therefore, in the output destination (for example, the management device or the external information processing device) by the mode information output means and the in-game information output means, the period during which the player actually plays in each display effect mode is detected, and the period is Can be stored and stored. And based on the information memorize | stored in the output destination, it becomes possible to compare the period which satisfy | fills predetermined conditions between each display effect mode. Thereby, evaluation with respect to each display effect mode can be performed, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation. In addition, the period in which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode reflects the player's support for each display effect mode, so the first display effect mode after power-on is set appropriately Or can be used as useful information for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B16, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B16, and the mode of the gaming machine B16 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine B16 is an effect control device 117.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as mode information output means of gaming machine B16, the process of S1208 and S1209 in the effect mode change confirmation process (FIG. 32) of the second embodiment, and the effect control device of the second embodiment The process of S1111 in the main process (FIG. 31) of 117 is exemplified, and the in-game information output means of the gaming machine B16 includes the processes of S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), The process of S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 is exemplified.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A mode in which information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is output to be able to be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine in a gaming machine comprising a control means Information output means and information indicating that the player is playing a game can be stored in storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine. Gaming machine B17, characterized in that it comprises a game-progress information output means for force.

  According to the gaming machine B17, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect based on the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, the information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is output by the mode information output means so as to be able to be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine. Information indicating that the player is playing a game (for example, the fact that the symbol is variably displayed, the state of game media being launched, etc.) is stored as predetermined information outside the gaming machine by the information output means during gaming. It is output so that it can be stored in a possible storage means.

  Therefore, in the storage means of the output destination (for example, the management device or the external information processing device) by the mode information output means and the in-game information output means, the period during which the player actually plays in each display effect mode is detected, The period can be accumulated and stored. And based on the information memorize | stored in the output destination, it becomes possible to compare the period which satisfy | fills predetermined conditions between each display effect mode. Thereby, evaluation with respect to each display effect mode can be performed, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation. In addition, the period in which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode reflects the player's support for each display effect mode, so the first display effect mode after power-on is set appropriately Or can be used as useful information for future game machine development.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine B17, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine B17, and the mode of the gaming machine B17. An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine B17 is an effect control device 117.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode information output means of the gaming machine B17 includes the processing of S1208 and S1209 in the presentation mode change confirmation processing (FIG. 32) of the second embodiment, and the presentation control device of the second embodiment. The process of S1111 in the main process (FIG. 31) of 117 is exemplified, and the in-game information output means of the gaming machine B17 includes the processes of S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), The process of S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the game machine B16 or B17 includes dynamic display control means for controlling the display means to dynamically display a symbol when a starting condition is satisfied, and the gaming information output means includes the dynamic display control means The gaming machine B18 is characterized in that information that can at least identify the start and end of the dynamic display under the control of is output to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine B18, when the start condition is satisfied, the dynamic display control unit controls the display unit to dynamically display the symbol, and the dynamic display control unit controls the dynamic display. Information that can at least identify the start and end of the display is output to the outside by the in-game information output means. Since the dynamic display of the symbol is useful information indicating that the player is playing, the output destination (eg, management device or external information) by the mode information output means and the in-game information output means. In the processing device), it is possible to accurately detect the period in which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode, and accumulate and store the period. Therefore, the accuracy of evaluation for each display effect mode can be enhanced.

  In each embodiment described above, an effect control device 117 is exemplified as the dynamic display control means of the gaming machine B18.

  In the gaming machine B16 or B17, the launching means for launching the game medium to the game area, the launch instructing means for instructing the launch of the game medium by the launching means, and the in-game information output means are the launch by the launch instructing means. The game machine B19 is characterized in that information indicating the status of the instruction is output to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine B19, when the launch support means instructs the launch of the game medium, the launch medium launches the game medium to the game area. Here, the information indicating the status of the instruction for launching by the launch instructing means is output to the outside by the in-game information output means. Since the release status of the game medium becomes useful information indicating that the player is playing, in the output destination (for example, management device or external information processing device) by the mode information output means and the in-game information output means, The period during which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode can be accurately detected, and the period can be accumulated and stored. Therefore, the accuracy of evaluation for each display effect mode can be enhanced.

  In each embodiment described above, the launching means of the gaming machine B19 is exemplified by the processing of S505 in the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 13 and 26), and the launching means of the gaming machine B19 is exemplified by the operation handle 51. Is exemplified.

  One of the gaming machines B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is confirmed and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  A gaming machine B21 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Any one of the gaming machines B1 to B19, wherein the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A gaming system comprising: a gaming machine having a control unit; and a management unit configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and managing the gaming machine. In the gaming machine, one display effect mode is the mode setting. Mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while being set in the means, each of the plurality of display effect modes, and the mode setting period Gaming system B1, characterized in that it comprises a said measured period of accumulating storable mode setting period storage means in association with the period measured by the measuring means.

  According to the gaming system B1, in the gaming machine, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the effect corresponding to the display effect mode set as such A display effect by data is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured periods are stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effects. Accumulated and stored in association with each mode.

  Therefore, since the total period (that is, the accumulated period) of the periods satisfying the predetermined conditions can be compared between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's level of support for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode or for future game machine development.

  In the gaming system B1, the measurement of the period by the mode setting period measuring unit is intended to include both the case where it is performed by the gaming machine and the case where it is performed by the management unit. In the gaming system B1, the mode setting period storage means is intended to include both provision in the gaming machine and provision in the management means. Further, in the gaming system B1, both the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means are not limited to being provided in either the gaming machine or the management means. Either one of the period storage means is provided in the gaming machine and the other is provided in the management means, or both the gaming machine and the management means are provided with the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means. Is also intended.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming system B1, and the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming system B1, and the mode of the gaming system B1. An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming system B1 is an effect control device 117.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measurement means of the gaming system B1 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the fluctuation display process (FIG. 21) and the process of S2022 in the changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34). As the mode setting period storage means of the gaming system B1, first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j of the pachinko machine 10, and first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500 are exemplified. The

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. When the control means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode. A gaming system comprising a gaming machine having mode switching means for switching and setting, and a management means configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and to manage the gaming machine In the gaming machine, mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, each of the plurality of display effect modes, and the mode A gaming system B2 comprising mode setting period storage means that can store and store the measured periods in association with the periods measured by the setting period measuring means.

  According to the gaming system B2, in the gaming machine, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the effect corresponding to the display effect mode set as such A display effect by data is performed by the display control means. Here, when the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is performed at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode by the mode switching means. Switch to and set. Thereby, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode after switching is performed by the display control means. That is, the display effect is executed in the display effect mode after switching.

  Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, a period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and the measured periods are stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effects. Accumulated and stored in association with each mode.

  Therefore, since the total period (that is, the accumulated period) of the periods satisfying the predetermined conditions can be compared between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the situation.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) The content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's level of support for each display effect mode. It can be used as useful information for appropriately setting the first display effect mode or for future game machine development.

  In the gaming system B2, the measurement of the period by the mode setting period measuring unit is intended to include both the case where it is performed by the gaming machine and the case where it is performed by the management unit. In the gaming system B1, the mode setting period storage means is intended to include both provision in the gaming machine and provision in the management means. Further, in the gaming system B2, both the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means are not limited to being provided in either the gaming machine or the management means. Either one of the period storage means is provided in the gaming machine and the other is provided in the management means, or both the gaming machine and the management means are provided with the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means. Is also intended.

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming system B2, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming system B2, and the mode of the gaming system B2 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming system B2 is an effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is exemplified as the operating means of the gaming system B2, and the mode switching means of the gaming system B2 is S1206 in the effect mode change confirmation means (FIGS. 18 and 32). The process is illustrated.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as a mode setting period measurement means of game system B2, the process of S1307 in a change display process (FIG. 21) and the process of S2022 in a changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34) are illustrated, As the mode setting period storage means of the gaming system B2, first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j of the pachinko machine 10, and first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500 are exemplified. The

  In the gaming system B1 or B2, the gaming machine comprises the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means.

  According to the gaming system B3, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine, and the period thus measured is Corresponding to the display effect mode as the measurement object, it is stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means of the gaming machine. Therefore, since the gaming machine performs measurement by the mode setting period measuring unit and storage of the period by the mode setting period storage unit, the configuration of the managing unit is configured even when the managing unit manages a plurality of gaming machines. There is no need to change. In addition, even if the installation hall of the gaming machine is changed, the storage (accumulation) of the period is performed for each gaming machine, so that it takes a long time from the time one gaming machine is manufactured until it is discarded. Data can be collected.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine B3 in the gaming system B3 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variation display process (FIG. 21), and the gaming machine mode setting period storage in the gaming system B3. As the means, first to third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j of the pachinko machine 10 are exemplified.

  In the gaming system B3, the gaming machine includes period information output means for outputting the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means to the management device, and the management means stores the mode setting period storage of the gaming machine. The mode setting period storage means different from the means and the mode setting period storage means of the management means add the contents output by the period information output means of the gaming machine to the mode setting period storage means of the management device. A gaming system B4 characterized by being stored.

  According to the gaming system B4, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine, and the period thus measured is measured. The mode setting period storage means of the gaming machine is stored in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes. Then, the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means of the gaming machine are output to the management means by the period information output means. The management means is provided with mode setting period storage means separately from the gaming machine, and the information (content stored in the mode setting period storage means of the gaming machine) output by the period information output means of the gaming machine is The information is additionally stored in the mode setting period storage means of the management means. Thereby, it is possible to accumulate a period satisfying a predetermined condition during execution of one display effect mode in the gaming machine on the management means side (mode setting period storage means of the management means). Therefore, it is possible to store the period in both the gaming machine and the management means, or prevent the gaming machine from accumulating the period. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each embodiment described above, the first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500 are exemplified as the mode setting period storage means of the management device in the gaming system B4.

  In the gaming system B3, the gaming machine displays the period for at least some of the display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes on the display means based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means. A gaming system B5 comprising a period display means.

  According to the gaming system B5, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine, the mode setting period measurement unit measures at least some display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes. The period is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine by the period display means. Therefore, since the period which satisfy | filled the predetermined condition in each display effect mode can be displayed, the use condition of each display effect mode can be visually transmitted for every game machine.

  Here, the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played the game in the display effect mode (for example, excluding the execution period of the waiting time effect from the time period in which the display effect mode is set for one variable time or the like) In this case, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means reflects the player's support level for each display effect mode. The contents can be useful information when setting the first display effect mode after the power is turned on (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In addition, at a predetermined time (for example, when the hall is closed), by confirming the contents displayed on the display means by the period display means for a certain period, future game machine development can be performed. Useful information can be obtained.

  In each embodiment described above, the process of S1015 in the start-up process (FIG. 16) of the effect control device 117 of the first embodiment is exemplified as the period display means of the gaming system B5.

  In the gaming system B1 or B2, the gaming machine associates the mode setting period measuring unit, the period measured by the mode setting period measuring unit, and the display effect mode to be measured, and outputs it to the managing unit. Period information output means, the management means includes the mode setting period storage means, and the mode setting period storage means of the management means measures the period output by the period information output means of the gaming machine. A gaming system B6, which is added to the mode setting period storage means and stored in association with the target display effect mode.

  According to the gaming system B6, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the period satisfying the predetermined condition is measured by the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine, and the period thus measured is The display effect mode that is the measurement target is associated with each other and output to the management unit by the period information output unit. Thereby, it is possible to accumulate a period satisfying a predetermined condition during execution of one display effect mode in the gaming machine on the management means side (mode setting period storage means of the management means). Therefore, it is possible to store the period in both the gaming machine and the management means, or prevent the gaming machine from accumulating the period. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine in the gaming system B6 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variation display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage of the managing unit in the gaming system B6. As the means, first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500 are exemplified.

  In the gaming system B1 or B2, the gaming machine indicates mode information output means for outputting information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means to the management means, and indicates that the player is playing a game. In-game information output means for outputting information to the management means, the management means comprises the mode setting period measuring means and the mode setting period storage means, and the mode setting period measuring means of the management means is Based on the information output by the mode information output means and the information output by the in-game information output means, a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means A gaming system B7 that is to be measured.

  According to the gaming system B7, information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is output to the management means by the mode information output means (part of the period information output means) of the gaming machine, while the game Information indicating that the player is playing a game (for example, the fact that the symbol is variably displayed or the state of the game medium being launched) is displayed by the gaming machine information output means (part of the period information output means). Output to management means. Based on the information output by the mode information output means and the in-game information output means, the period during which the player actually plays in each display effect mode is measured by the mode setting period measurement means of the management means. The measurement result is stored (accumulated) in the mode setting period storage means of the management means.

  Therefore, the period during which the player is actually playing in each display effect mode can be accumulated and stored in the mode setting period storage means of the management means. Thereby, the period can be stored in both the gaming machine and the management means, or the period can be prevented from being accumulated on the gaming machine side. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, as mode information output means of game system B7, the process of S1208 and S1209 in the effect mode change confirmation process (FIG. 32) of 2nd Embodiment, and the effect control apparatus of 2nd Embodiment The process of S1111 in the main process (FIG. 31) of 117 is exemplified, and the in-game information output means of the gaming system B7 includes the processes of S1502, S1503, S1505, and S1506 in the hall computer output information setting process (FIG. 27), The process of S201 in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main controller 110 is exemplified.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period measurement means of the management means in the gaming system B7 is exemplified by the process of S2022 in the changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34), and the mode setting of the management means in the gaming system B7 is illustrated. Examples of the period storage means include first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c of the hall computer 500.

  In the gaming system B6 or B7, the management means, when a predetermined operation is performed, based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means, at least some display effects in the plurality of display effect modes A gaming system B8, characterized by comprising period output means for outputting a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means for the mode.

  According to the gaming system B8, when a predetermined operation is performed on the management means, at least a part of the plurality of display effect modes is based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means of the management means. For the display effect mode, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine is output by the period output means. Note that, for example, a display device or a printing device connected to the management unit, or a gaming machine connected to the management unit can be set as the output destination of the period.

  Therefore, since the period that satisfies the predetermined condition can be output in each display effect mode, the usage status of each display effect mode can be transmitted, and the display content is set to the first display effect mode after power-on. This can be useful information when the display effect mode is switched (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In particular, if the output is a visual output such as display or printing, the usage status of each display effect mode is visually transmitted, and thus the status is easily recognized.

  In any one of the gaming systems B1 to B8, the gaming machine is any one of the gaming machines B20 to B22.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A gaming machine having a control unit and a management unit configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and managing the gaming machine, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit, a predetermined condition is set When period information that can acquire a period to be satisfied is received from the gaming machine, one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means based on the period information. Mode setting period acquisition means for acquiring a period satisfying a predetermined condition in the above, and storing the measured period in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means Management means B1 comprising a mode setting period storage means capable of storage.

  According to the management means B1, when the period information that can acquire the period satisfying the predetermined condition is received from the gaming machine while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, based on the received period information. Thus, the mode setting period acquisition unit acquires a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit of the gaming machine. The acquired period is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes.

  Therefore, since the total period (that is, the accumulated period) of the periods satisfying the predetermined conditions can be compared between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the situation. Further, the period can be stored in both the gaming machine and the management unit, or the period can be prevented from being accumulated on the gaming machine side. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the mode setting period acquisition unit of the management unit B1 is exemplified by the processing of S2022 and S2027 in the changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34), and is used as the mode setting period storage unit of the management unit B1. The first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are exemplified.

  In the management means B1, the mode setting means for at least some display effect modes in the plurality of display effect modes based on the contents stored in the mode setting period storage means when a predetermined operation is performed. Management means B2 comprising a period output means for outputting a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set.

  According to the management unit B2, when a predetermined operation is performed on the management unit, at least a part of the plurality of display effect modes is based on the content stored in the mode setting period storage unit of the management unit. For the display effect mode, a period that satisfies a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the gaming machine is output by the period output means. Note that, for example, a display device or a printing device connected to the management unit, or a gaming machine connected to the management unit can be set as the output destination of the period.

  Therefore, since the period that satisfies the predetermined condition can be output in each display effect mode, the usage status of each display effect mode can be transmitted, and the display content is set to the first display effect mode after power-on. This can be useful information when the display effect mode is switched (that is, the display effect mode is switched by the mode switching specifying means). In particular, if the output is a visual output such as display or printing, the usage status of each display effect mode is visually transmitted, and thus the status is easily recognized.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine comprising a control means, mode setting period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, each of the plurality of display effect modes, and the A mode setting period storage unit capable of storing the measured period in association with the period measured by the mode setting period measuring unit. Game machine C1 to.

  According to the gaming machine C1, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, measurement for a predetermined period is performed by the mode setting period measurement means, and the measured period is stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effect modes. Are stored in association with each of the above.

  Therefore, since it is possible to compare the periods measured between the display effect modes based on the contents of the mode setting period storage means, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, and thereby the hall circumstances It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably cope with the above.

  Here, the predetermined period is set to, for example, a period in which variable display is executed, a period in which one display effect mode is set, or a period in which a customer waiting effect execution period is excluded, or one display effect mode. And so on, from the content stored in the mode setting period storage means to each display, for example, the period until the display is switched to another display effect mode (that is, the period set in one display effect mode). Since it is possible to determine the player's level of support for the production mode, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means can be set appropriately for the first display production mode after the power is turned on, and future gaming machine development It can be used as useful information for performing

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine C1, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine C1, and the mode setting means of the gaming machine C1. As an example, the mode selection counter 273a is exemplified, and as the display control means of the gaming machine C1, an effect control device 117 is exemplified.

  In each embodiment described above, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine C1 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variation display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine C1 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. When the control means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode. In a gaming machine comprising a mode switching means for switching and setting, a mode for measuring a predetermined period while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. Mode setting period measuring means, and a mode setting period storage means capable of storing each of the plurality of display effect modes and the period measured by the mode setting period measuring means in association with each other. A gaming machine C2 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine C2, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, when the operation by the operation means that can be operated by the player is performed at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode by the mode switching means. Switch to and set. Thereby, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode after switching is performed by the display control means. That is, the display effect is executed in the display effect mode after switching.

  Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, measurement for a predetermined period is performed by the mode setting period measurement means, and the measured period is stored in the mode setting period storage means in a plurality of display effect modes. Are stored in association with each of the above.

  Therefore, since it is possible to compare the periods measured between the display effect modes based on the contents of the mode setting period storage means, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, and thereby the hall circumstances It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably cope with the above.

  Here, the predetermined period is set to, for example, a period in which variable display is executed, a period in which one display effect mode is set, or a period in which a customer waiting effect execution period is excluded, or one display effect mode. And so on, from the content stored in the mode setting period storage means to each display, for example, the period until the display is switched to another display effect mode (that is, the period set in one display effect mode). Since it is possible to determine the player's level of support for the production mode, the content stored in the mode setting period storage means can be set appropriately for the first display production mode after the power is turned on, and future gaming machine development It can be used as useful information for performing

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine C2, and the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine C2, and the mode of the gaming machine C2 An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine C2 is an effect control device 117.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is exemplified as the operation means of the gaming machine C2, and the mode switching means of the gaming machine C2 is S1206 in the effect mode change confirmation means (FIGS. 18 and 32). The process is illustrated.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period measuring unit of the gaming machine C2 is exemplified by the process of S1307 in the variation display process (FIG. 21), and the mode setting period storage unit of the gaming machine C2 is the first The third mode total stay time memories 273h to 273j are exemplified.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. A mode in which each of the plurality of display effect modes can be stored in association with a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means in a gaming machine comprising a control means A predetermined value for when the predetermined condition is satisfied once while the set period storage means and one display effect mode are set in the mode setting means is the predetermined condition. And a prescribed value storage means for storing in accordance with the predetermined condition stored in the prescribed value storage means for each time the predetermined condition is established, and the display effect mode being executed as the period. A gaming machine C3, comprising: a storage execution means for storing in the mode setting period storage means in association with each other.

  According to the gaming machine C3, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, every time the predetermined condition is satisfied once, the specified value according to the predetermined condition stored in the specified value storage means is associated with the display effect mode being executed as the period satisfying the predetermined condition, and the mode setting period Since it is stored in the storage means, it is possible to estimate the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied in each display effect mode. Therefore, since it is possible to compare the period satisfying the predetermined condition between the display effect modes, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, thereby providing a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall circumstances. Is possible. Further, at this time, it is not necessary to actually measure a period that satisfies the predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, so that the control can be facilitated.

  Here, when the predetermined condition is a condition indicating that the player has actually played in the display effect mode (for example, establishment of a start condition, execution of a variable display, launch of a ball, etc.), the mode The content stored in the setting period storage means reflects the player's support for each display effect mode, so the first display effect mode after power-on can be set appropriately, and future game machine development It can be used as useful information for performing

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine C3, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine C3, and the mode of the gaming machine C3. An example of the setting means is a mode selection counter 273a, and an example of the display control means of the gaming machine C3 is an effect control device 117.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In the gaming machine comprising the control means, the mode setting period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the mode setting period measuring means A gaming machine C4, comprising information output means for associating a period and a display effect mode as a measurement target and outputting them to the outside.

  According to the gaming machine C4, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data according to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, measurement for a predetermined period is performed by the mode setting period measurement means, and the measured period is associated with the display effect mode to be measured. And output to the outside by the information output means.

  Therefore, since the period measured in each display effect mode can be stored in the output destination management device or the external information processing device or the external storage medium, based on the information stored in the output destination, It is possible to compare the measured periods between the display effect modes. Thereby, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  Here, the predetermined period is set to, for example, a period in which variable display is executed, a period in which one display effect mode is set, or a period in which a customer waiting effect execution period is excluded, or one display effect mode. From the information stored at the output destination by the information output means, for example, the period until the display is switched to another display effect mode (ie, the period set in one display effect mode). Since it is possible to determine the player's support level for each display effect mode, it is useful information for setting the first display effect mode after turning on the power and developing future gaming machines. Can be used as

  In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine C4, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine C4, and the mode of the gaming machine C4. The setting means is exemplified by a mode selection counter 273a, the display control means of the gaming machine C4 is exemplified by an effect control device 117, and the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine C4 is exemplified by variable display processing (FIG. 21). The process of S1307 in FIG.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In the gaming machine comprising the control means, the mode setting period measuring means for measuring a predetermined period while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, and the mode setting period measuring means The period and the display effect mode that is the measurement target are associated with each other and output so that predetermined information can be stored in the storage means that can be stored outside the gaming machine. Gaming machine C5, characterized in that it comprises a that information output means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, when one display effect mode is set by the mode setting means from among a plurality of display effect modes, the display effect by the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set as such. Is performed by the display control means. Here, while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means, the measurement for a predetermined period is measured by the mode setting period measurement means, and the measured period is associated with the display effect mode to be measured. Then, the information output means outputs the information so that it can be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine.

  Therefore, since the period measured in each display effect mode can be stored in the storage device or the external storage medium of the output destination management device or the external information processing device, the information stored in the output destination Based on this, it is possible to compare the measured periods between the display effect modes. Thereby, evaluation with respect to each display effect mode can be performed, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can appropriately cope with the hall situation.

  Here, the predetermined period is set to, for example, a period in which variable display is executed, a period in which one display effect mode is set, or a period in which a customer waiting effect execution period is excluded, or one display effect mode. From the information stored at the output destination by the information output means, for example, the period until the display is switched to another display effect mode (ie, the period set in one display effect mode). Since it is possible to determine the player's support level for each display effect mode, it is useful information for setting the first display effect mode after turning on the power and developing future gaming machines. Can be used as

  In each embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is exemplified as the display means of the gaming machine C5, the character ROM 275 is exemplified as the effect data control means of the gaming machine C5, and the mode of the gaming machine C5. The setting means is exemplified by a mode selection counter 273a, the display control means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by an effect control device 117, and the mode setting period measuring means of the gaming machine C5 is exemplified by variable display processing (FIG. 21). The process of S1307 in FIG.

  A gaming system C1 comprising any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5 and a management unit configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine and managing the gaming machine.

  A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. And a management unit configured to be able to communicate with the gaming machine having a control unit, and for managing the gaming machine, a predetermined period during which one display effect mode is set in the mode setting unit. When the period information that can be acquired is received from the gaming machine, based on the period information, while the one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means. A mode setting period that can store the measured period by associating each of the plurality of display effect modes with the period acquired by the mode setting period acquiring unit. Management means C1 comprising storage means.

  According to the management means C1, when period information that can acquire a predetermined period while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means is received from the gaming machine, the game is based on the received period information. A predetermined period during which one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means of the machine is acquired by the mode setting period acquisition means. The period thus acquired is stored in the mode setting period storage unit in association with each of the plurality of display effect modes.

  Therefore, since it is possible to compare the periods measured between the display effect modes based on the contents of the mode setting period storage means, it is possible to evaluate each display effect mode, and thereby the hall circumstances It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably cope with the above. Further, the period can be stored in both the gaming machine and the management means, or the period can be prevented from being stored on the gaming machine side. In the former case, it is possible to prevent the information of the period from being completely lost due to a plurality of storage locations. In the latter case, the storage contents can be retained even when the power is shut off. This is advantageous for the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the mode setting period acquisition unit of the management unit C1 is exemplified by the processing of S2022 and S2027 in the changing signal confirmation process (FIG. 34), and is used as the mode setting period storage unit of the management unit C1. The first to third mode total stay time memories 504a to 504c are exemplified.

1 gaming system 10 pachinko machine (game machine)
110 Main control device 117 Production control device 500 Hall computer (management means)

Claims (4)

A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. When the control means, the operation means operable by the player, and the operation means are operated at a predetermined time, the display effect mode set in the mode setting means is changed to another display effect mode. In a gaming machine comprising mode switching means for switching and setting,
Mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means;
Each of the plurality of display effect modes is associated with a period measured by the mode setting period measuring means, and mode setting period storage means capable of storing and storing the measured periods is provided. A gaming machine. With a main power supply,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the mode setting period storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored contents even when power supply from the main power supply is disabled. A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means,
Mode setting period measuring means for measuring a period satisfying a predetermined condition while one display effect mode is set in the mode setting means;
Information output means for outputting the period measured by the mode setting period measurement means and the display effect mode as the measurement target so as to be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: A display means capable of executing a display effect, an effect data storage means for storing effect data capable of executing display effects in a plurality of display effect modes, and one display effect mode is set from the plurality of display effect modes. A display for displaying the display effect on the display means using the effect data corresponding to the display effect mode set in the mode setting means from the effect setting data stored in the mode setting means and the effect data storage means. In a gaming machine equipped with a control means,
Mode information output means for outputting information indicating the display effect mode set in the mode setting means so as to be stored in a storage means capable of storing predetermined information outside the gaming machine;
It is characterized by comprising in-game information output means for outputting information indicating that the player is playing a game so that predetermined information can be stored outside the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

Images